blob: 3bc5cf4b0a1df6e61a299ff65a9ed29bcee14657 [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00001*syntax.txt* For Vim version 8.2. Last change: 2021 Nov 20
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002
3
4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
5
6
7Syntax highlighting *syntax* *syntax-highlighting* *coloring*
8
9Syntax highlighting enables Vim to show parts of the text in another font or
10color. Those parts can be specific keywords or text matching a pattern. Vim
11doesn't parse the whole file (to keep it fast), so the highlighting has its
12limitations. Lexical highlighting might be a better name, but since everybody
13calls it syntax highlighting we'll stick with that.
14
15Vim supports syntax highlighting on all terminals. But since most ordinary
16terminals have very limited highlighting possibilities, it works best in the
17GUI version, gvim.
18
19In the User Manual:
20|usr_06.txt| introduces syntax highlighting.
21|usr_44.txt| introduces writing a syntax file.
22
231. Quick start |:syn-qstart|
242. Syntax files |:syn-files|
253. Syntax loading procedure |syntax-loading|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100264. Converting to HTML |2html.vim|
275. Syntax file remarks |:syn-file-remarks|
286. Defining a syntax |:syn-define|
297. :syntax arguments |:syn-arguments|
308. Syntax patterns |:syn-pattern|
319. Syntax clusters |:syn-cluster|
Bram Moolenaarc8c88492018-12-27 23:59:26 +01003210. Including syntax files |:syn-include|
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003311. Synchronizing |:syn-sync|
3412. Listing syntax items |:syntax|
3513. Highlight command |:highlight|
3614. Linking groups |:highlight-link|
3715. Cleaning up |:syn-clear|
3816. Highlighting tags |tag-highlight|
3917. Window-local syntax |:ownsyntax|
4018. Color xterms |xterm-color|
4119. When syntax is slow |:syntime|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000042
43{Vi does not have any of these commands}
44
45Syntax highlighting is not available when the |+syntax| feature has been
46disabled at compile time.
47
48==============================================================================
491. Quick start *:syn-qstart*
50
51 *:syn-enable* *:syntax-enable*
52This command switches on syntax highlighting: >
53
54 :syntax enable
55
56What this command actually does is to execute the command >
57 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
58
59If the VIM environment variable is not set, Vim will try to find
60the path in another way (see |$VIMRUNTIME|). Usually this works just
61fine. If it doesn't, try setting the VIM environment variable to the
62directory where the Vim stuff is located. For example, if your syntax files
Bram Moolenaar8024f932020-01-14 19:29:13 +010063are in the "/usr/vim/vim82/syntax" directory, set $VIMRUNTIME to
64"/usr/vim/vim82". You must do this in the shell, before starting Vim.
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +010065This command also sources the |menu.vim| script when the GUI is running or
66will start soon. See |'go-M'| about avoiding that.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000067
68 *:syn-on* *:syntax-on*
Bram Moolenaar4072ba52020-12-23 13:56:35 +010069The `:syntax enable` command will keep most of your current color settings.
70This allows using `:highlight` commands to set your preferred colors before or
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000071after using this command. If you want Vim to overrule your settings with the
72defaults, use: >
73 :syntax on
74<
75 *:hi-normal* *:highlight-normal*
76If you are running in the GUI, you can get white text on a black background
77with: >
78 :highlight Normal guibg=Black guifg=White
79For a color terminal see |:hi-normal-cterm|.
80For setting up your own colors syntax highlighting see |syncolor|.
81
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010082NOTE: The syntax files on MS-Windows have lines that end in <CR><NL>.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000083The files for Unix end in <NL>. This means you should use the right type of
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +010084file for your system. Although on MS-Windows the right format is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000085automatically selected if the 'fileformats' option is not empty.
86
87NOTE: When using reverse video ("gvim -fg white -bg black"), the default value
88of 'background' will not be set until the GUI window is opened, which is after
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000089reading the |gvimrc|. This will cause the wrong default highlighting to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000090used. To set the default value of 'background' before switching on
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000091highlighting, include the ":gui" command in the |gvimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000092
93 :gui " open window and set default for 'background'
94 :syntax on " start highlighting, use 'background' to set colors
95
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +000096NOTE: Using ":gui" in the |gvimrc| means that "gvim -f" won't start in the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000097foreground! Use ":gui -f" then.
98
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +020099 *g:syntax_on*
100You can toggle the syntax on/off with this command: >
101 :if exists("g:syntax_on") | syntax off | else | syntax enable | endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000102
103To put this into a mapping, you can use: >
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +0200104 :map <F7> :if exists("g:syntax_on") <Bar>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000105 \ syntax off <Bar>
106 \ else <Bar>
107 \ syntax enable <Bar>
108 \ endif <CR>
109[using the |<>| notation, type this literally]
110
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000111Details:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000112The ":syntax" commands are implemented by sourcing a file. To see exactly how
113this works, look in the file:
114 command file ~
115 :syntax enable $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
116 :syntax on $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
117 :syntax manual $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/manual.vim
118 :syntax off $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
119Also see |syntax-loading|.
120
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100121NOTE: If displaying long lines is slow and switching off syntax highlighting
122makes it fast, consider setting the 'synmaxcol' option to a lower value.
123
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000124==============================================================================
1252. Syntax files *:syn-files*
126
127The syntax and highlighting commands for one language are normally stored in
128a syntax file. The name convention is: "{name}.vim". Where {name} is the
129name of the language, or an abbreviation (to fit the name in 8.3 characters,
130a requirement in case the file is used on a DOS filesystem).
131Examples:
132 c.vim perl.vim java.vim html.vim
133 cpp.vim sh.vim csh.vim
134
135The syntax file can contain any Ex commands, just like a vimrc file. But
136the idea is that only commands for a specific language are included. When a
137language is a superset of another language, it may include the other one,
138for example, the cpp.vim file could include the c.vim file: >
139 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/c.vim
140
141The .vim files are normally loaded with an autocommand. For example: >
142 :au Syntax c runtime! syntax/c.vim
143 :au Syntax cpp runtime! syntax/cpp.vim
144These commands are normally in the file $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/synload.vim.
145
146
147MAKING YOUR OWN SYNTAX FILES *mysyntaxfile*
148
149When you create your own syntax files, and you want to have Vim use these
150automatically with ":syntax enable", do this:
151
1521. Create your user runtime directory. You would normally use the first item
153 of the 'runtimepath' option. Example for Unix: >
154 mkdir ~/.vim
155
1562. Create a directory in there called "syntax". For Unix: >
157 mkdir ~/.vim/syntax
158
1593. Write the Vim syntax file. Or download one from the internet. Then write
160 it in your syntax directory. For example, for the "mine" syntax: >
161 :w ~/.vim/syntax/mine.vim
162
163Now you can start using your syntax file manually: >
164 :set syntax=mine
165You don't have to exit Vim to use this.
166
167If you also want Vim to detect the type of file, see |new-filetype|.
168
169If you are setting up a system with many users and you don't want each user
170to add the same syntax file, you can use another directory from 'runtimepath'.
171
172
173ADDING TO AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-add*
174
175If you are mostly satisfied with an existing syntax file, but would like to
176add a few items or change the highlighting, follow these steps:
177
1781. Create your user directory from 'runtimepath', see above.
179
1802. Create a directory in there called "after/syntax". For Unix: >
181 mkdir ~/.vim/after
182 mkdir ~/.vim/after/syntax
183
1843. Write a Vim script that contains the commands you want to use. For
185 example, to change the colors for the C syntax: >
186 highlight cComment ctermfg=Green guifg=Green
187
1884. Write that file in the "after/syntax" directory. Use the name of the
189 syntax, with ".vim" added. For our C syntax: >
190 :w ~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim
191
192That's it. The next time you edit a C file the Comment color will be
193different. You don't even have to restart Vim.
194
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +0000195If you have multiple files, you can use the filetype as the directory name.
196All the "*.vim" files in this directory will be used, for example:
197 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/one.vim
198 ~/.vim/after/syntax/c/two.vim
199
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000200
201REPLACING AN EXISTING SYNTAX FILE *mysyntaxfile-replace*
202
203If you don't like a distributed syntax file, or you have downloaded a new
204version, follow the same steps as for |mysyntaxfile| above. Just make sure
205that you write the syntax file in a directory that is early in 'runtimepath'.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200206Vim will only load the first syntax file found, assuming that it sets
207b:current_syntax.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000208
209
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100210NAMING CONVENTIONS *group-name* *{group-name}* *E669* *W18*
211
212A syntax group name is to be used for syntax items that match the same kind of
213thing. These are then linked to a highlight group that specifies the color.
214A syntax group name doesn't specify any color or attributes itself.
215
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000216The name for a highlight or syntax group must consist of ASCII letters, digits
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +0100217and the underscore. As a regexp: "[a-zA-Z0-9_]*". However, Vim does not give
218an error when using other characters.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000219
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +0100220To be able to allow each user to pick their favorite set of colors, there must
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000221be preferred names for highlight groups that are common for many languages.
222These are the suggested group names (if syntax highlighting works properly
223you can see the actual color, except for "Ignore"):
224
225 *Comment any comment
226
227 *Constant any constant
228 String a string constant: "this is a string"
229 Character a character constant: 'c', '\n'
230 Number a number constant: 234, 0xff
231 Boolean a boolean constant: TRUE, false
232 Float a floating point constant: 2.3e10
233
234 *Identifier any variable name
235 Function function name (also: methods for classes)
236
237 *Statement any statement
238 Conditional if, then, else, endif, switch, etc.
239 Repeat for, do, while, etc.
240 Label case, default, etc.
241 Operator "sizeof", "+", "*", etc.
242 Keyword any other keyword
243 Exception try, catch, throw
244
245 *PreProc generic Preprocessor
246 Include preprocessor #include
247 Define preprocessor #define
248 Macro same as Define
249 PreCondit preprocessor #if, #else, #endif, etc.
250
251 *Type int, long, char, etc.
252 StorageClass static, register, volatile, etc.
253 Structure struct, union, enum, etc.
254 Typedef A typedef
255
256 *Special any special symbol
257 SpecialChar special character in a constant
258 Tag you can use CTRL-] on this
259 Delimiter character that needs attention
260 SpecialComment special things inside a comment
261 Debug debugging statements
262
263 *Underlined text that stands out, HTML links
264
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200265 *Ignore left blank, hidden |hl-Ignore|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000266
267 *Error any erroneous construct
268
269 *Todo anything that needs extra attention; mostly the
270 keywords TODO FIXME and XXX
271
272The names marked with * are the preferred groups; the others are minor groups.
273For the preferred groups, the "syntax.vim" file contains default highlighting.
274The minor groups are linked to the preferred groups, so they get the same
275highlighting. You can override these defaults by using ":highlight" commands
276after sourcing the "syntax.vim" file.
277
278Note that highlight group names are not case sensitive. "String" and "string"
279can be used for the same group.
280
281The following names are reserved and cannot be used as a group name:
282 NONE ALL ALLBUT contains contained
283
Bram Moolenaar4f99eae2010-07-24 15:56:43 +0200284 *hl-Ignore*
285When using the Ignore group, you may also consider using the conceal
286mechanism. See |conceal|.
287
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000288==============================================================================
2893. Syntax loading procedure *syntax-loading*
290
291This explains the details that happen when the command ":syntax enable" is
292issued. When Vim initializes itself, it finds out where the runtime files are
293located. This is used here as the variable |$VIMRUNTIME|.
294
295":syntax enable" and ":syntax on" do the following:
296
297 Source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim
298 |
299 +- Clear out any old syntax by sourcing $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
300 |
301 +- Source first syntax/synload.vim in 'runtimepath'
302 | |
303 | +- Setup the colors for syntax highlighting. If a color scheme is
304 | | defined it is loaded again with ":colors {name}". Otherwise
305 | | ":runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim" is used. ":syntax on" overrules
306 | | existing colors, ":syntax enable" only sets groups that weren't
307 | | set yet.
308 | |
309 | +- Set up syntax autocmds to load the appropriate syntax file when
310 | | the 'syntax' option is set. *synload-1*
311 | |
312 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the |mysyntaxfile| variable.
313 | This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only. *synload-2*
314 |
315 +- Do ":filetype on", which does ":runtime! filetype.vim". It loads any
316 | filetype.vim files found. It should always Source
317 | $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim, which does the following.
318 | |
319 | +- Install autocmds based on suffix to set the 'filetype' option
320 | | This is where the connection between file name and file type is
321 | | made for known file types. *synload-3*
322 | |
323 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myfiletypefile*
324 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
325 | | *synload-4*
326 | |
327 | +- Install one autocommand which sources scripts.vim when no file
328 | | type was detected yet. *synload-5*
329 | |
330 | +- Source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim, to setup the Syntax menu. |menu.vim|
331 |
332 +- Install a FileType autocommand to set the 'syntax' option when a file
333 | type has been detected. *synload-6*
334 |
335 +- Execute syntax autocommands to start syntax highlighting for each
336 already loaded buffer.
337
338
339Upon loading a file, Vim finds the relevant syntax file as follows:
340
341 Loading the file triggers the BufReadPost autocommands.
342 |
343 +- If there is a match with one of the autocommands from |synload-3|
344 | (known file types) or |synload-4| (user's file types), the 'filetype'
345 | option is set to the file type.
346 |
347 +- The autocommand at |synload-5| is triggered. If the file type was not
348 | found yet, then scripts.vim is searched for in 'runtimepath'. This
349 | should always load $VIMRUNTIME/scripts.vim, which does the following.
350 | |
351 | +- Source the user's optional file, from the *myscriptsfile*
352 | | variable. This is for backwards compatibility with Vim 5.x only.
353 | |
354 | +- If the file type is still unknown, check the contents of the file,
355 | again with checks like "getline(1) =~ pattern" as to whether the
356 | file type can be recognized, and set 'filetype'.
357 |
358 +- When the file type was determined and 'filetype' was set, this
359 | triggers the FileType autocommand |synload-6| above. It sets
360 | 'syntax' to the determined file type.
361 |
362 +- When the 'syntax' option was set above, this triggers an autocommand
363 | from |synload-1| (and |synload-2|). This find the main syntax file in
364 | 'runtimepath', with this command:
365 | runtime! syntax/<name>.vim
366 |
367 +- Any other user installed FileType or Syntax autocommands are
368 triggered. This can be used to change the highlighting for a specific
369 syntax.
370
371==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003724. Conversion to HTML *2html.vim* *convert-to-HTML*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000373
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +01003742html is not a syntax file itself, but a script that converts the current
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200375window into HTML. Vim opens a new window in which it builds the HTML file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000376
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200377After you save the resulting file, you can view it with any browser. The
378colors should be exactly the same as you see them in Vim. With
379|g:html_line_ids| you can jump to specific lines by adding (for example) #L123
380or #123 to the end of the URL in your browser's address bar. And with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +0200381|g:html_dynamic_folds| enabled, you can show or hide the text that is folded
382in Vim.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200383
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000384You are not supposed to set the 'filetype' or 'syntax' option to "2html"!
385Source the script to convert the current file: >
386
387 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
388<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200389Many variables affect the output of 2html.vim; see below. Any of the on/off
390options listed below can be enabled or disabled by setting them explicitly to
391the desired value, or restored to their default by removing the variable using
392|:unlet|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000393
394Remarks:
Bram Moolenaar076e8b22010-08-05 21:54:00 +0200395- Some truly ancient browsers may not show the background colors.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000396- From most browsers you can also print the file (in color)!
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200397- The latest TOhtml may actually work with older versions of Vim, but some
Bram Moolenaar166af9b2010-11-16 20:34:40 +0100398 features such as conceal support will not function, and the colors may be
399 incorrect for an old Vim without GUI support compiled in.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000400
401Here is an example how to run the script over all .c and .h files from a
402Unix shell: >
403 for f in *.[ch]; do gvim -f +"syn on" +"run! syntax/2html.vim" +"wq" +"q" $f; done
404<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200405 *g:html_start_line* *g:html_end_line*
406To restrict the conversion to a range of lines, use a range with the |:TOhtml|
407command below, or set "g:html_start_line" and "g:html_end_line" to the first
408and last line to be converted. Example, using the last set Visual area: >
409
410 :let g:html_start_line = line("'<")
411 :let g:html_end_line = line("'>")
412 :runtime! syntax/2html.vim
413<
414 *:TOhtml*
415:[range]TOhtml The ":TOhtml" command is defined in a standard plugin.
416 This command will source |2html.vim| for you. When a
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200417 range is given, this command sets |g:html_start_line|
418 and |g:html_end_line| to the start and end of the
419 range, respectively. Default range is the entire
420 buffer.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200421
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200422 If the current window is part of a |diff|, unless
423 |g:html_diff_one_file| is set, :TOhtml will convert
424 all windows which are part of the diff in the current
425 tab and place them side-by-side in a <table> element
426 in the generated HTML. With |g:html_line_ids| you can
427 jump to lines in specific windows with (for example)
428 #W1L42 for line 42 in the first diffed window, or
429 #W3L87 for line 87 in the third.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200430
431 Examples: >
432
433 :10,40TOhtml " convert lines 10-40 to html
434 :'<,'>TOhtml " convert current/last visual selection
435 :TOhtml " convert entire buffer
436<
437 *g:html_diff_one_file*
438Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200439When 0, and using |:TOhtml| all windows involved in a |diff| in the current tab
440page are converted to HTML and placed side-by-side in a <table> element. When
4411, only the current buffer is converted.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200442Example: >
443
444 let g:html_diff_one_file = 1
445<
446 *g:html_whole_filler*
447Default: 0.
448When 0, if |g:html_diff_one_file| is 1, a sequence of more than 3 filler lines
449is displayed as three lines with the middle line mentioning the total number
450of inserted lines.
451When 1, always display all inserted lines as if |g:html_diff_one_file| were
452not set.
453>
454 :let g:html_whole_filler = 1
455<
456 *TOhtml-performance* *g:html_no_progress*
457Default: 0.
458When 0, display a progress bar in the statusline for each major step in the
4592html.vim conversion process.
460When 1, do not display the progress bar. This offers a minor speed improvement
461but you won't have any idea how much longer the conversion might take; for big
462files it can take a long time!
463Example: >
464
465 let g:html_no_progress = 1
466<
467You can obtain better performance improvements by also instructing Vim to not
468run interactively, so that too much time is not taken to redraw as the script
469moves through the buffer, switches windows, and the like: >
470
471 vim -E -s -c "let g:html_no_progress=1" -c "syntax on" -c "set ft=c" -c "runtime syntax/2html.vim" -cwqa myfile.c
472<
473Note that the -s flag prevents loading your .vimrc and any plugins, so you
474need to explicitly source/enable anything that will affect the HTML
475conversion. See |-E| and |-s-ex| for details. It is probably best to create a
476script to replace all the -c commands and use it with the -u flag instead of
477specifying each command separately.
478
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100479 *hl-TOhtmlProgress* *TOhtml-progress-color*
480When displayed, the progress bar will show colored boxes along the statusline
481as the HTML conversion proceeds. By default, the background color as the
482current "DiffDelete" highlight group is used. If "DiffDelete" and "StatusLine"
483have the same background color, TOhtml will automatically adjust the color to
484differ. If you do not like the automatically selected colors, you can define
485your own highlight colors for the progress bar. Example: >
486
487 hi TOhtmlProgress guifg=#c0ffee ctermbg=7
488<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200489 *g:html_number_lines*
490Default: current 'number' setting.
491When 0, buffer text is displayed in the generated HTML without line numbering.
492When 1, a column of line numbers is added to the generated HTML with the same
493highlighting as the line number column in Vim (|hl-LineNr|).
494Force line numbers even if 'number' is not set: >
495 :let g:html_number_lines = 1
496Force to omit the line numbers: >
497 :let g:html_number_lines = 0
498Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
499 :unlet g:html_number_lines
500<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200501 *g:html_line_ids*
502Default: 1 if |g:html_number_lines| is set, 0 otherwise.
503When 1, adds an HTML id attribute to each line number, or to an empty <span>
504inserted for that purpose if no line numbers are shown. This ID attribute
505takes the form of L123 for single-buffer HTML pages, or W2L123 for diff-view
506pages, and is used to jump to a specific line (in a specific window of a diff
507view). Javascript is inserted to open any closed dynamic folds
Bram Moolenaar34401cc2014-08-29 15:12:19 +0200508(|g:html_dynamic_folds|) containing the specified line before jumping. The
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200509javascript also allows omitting the window ID in the url, and the leading L.
510For example: >
511
512 page.html#L123 jumps to line 123 in a single-buffer file
513 page.html#123 does the same
514
515 diff.html#W1L42 jumps to line 42 in the first window in a diff
516 diff.html#42 does the same
517<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200518 *g:html_use_css*
519Default: 1.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100520When 1, generate valid HTML 5 markup with CSS styling, supported in all modern
521browsers and many old browsers.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200522When 0, generate <font> tags and similar outdated markup. This is not
523recommended but it may work better in really old browsers, email clients,
524forum posts, and similar situations where basic CSS support is unavailable.
525Example: >
526 :let g:html_use_css = 0
527<
528 *g:html_ignore_conceal*
529Default: 0.
530When 0, concealed text is removed from the HTML and replaced with a character
531from |:syn-cchar| or 'listchars' as appropriate, depending on the current
532value of 'conceallevel'.
533When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML, even if it is
534|conceal|ed.
535
536Either of the following commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is
537included in the generated HTML (unless it is folded): >
538 :let g:html_ignore_conceal = 1
539 :setl conceallevel=0
540<
541 *g:html_ignore_folding*
542Default: 0.
543When 0, text in a closed fold is replaced by the text shown for the fold in
544Vim (|fold-foldtext|). See |g:html_dynamic_folds| if you also want to allow
545the user to expand the fold as in Vim to see the text inside.
546When 1, include all text from the buffer in the generated HTML; whether the
547text is in a fold has no impact at all. |g:html_dynamic_folds| has no effect.
548
549Either of these commands will ensure that all text in the buffer is included
550in the generated HTML (unless it is concealed): >
551 zR
552 :let g:html_ignore_folding = 1
553<
554 *g:html_dynamic_folds*
555Default: 0.
556When 0, text in a closed fold is not included at all in the generated HTML.
557When 1, generate javascript to open a fold and show the text within, just like
558in Vim.
559
560Setting this variable to 1 causes 2html.vim to always use CSS for styling,
561regardless of what |g:html_use_css| is set to.
562
563This variable is ignored when |g:html_ignore_folding| is set.
564>
565 :let g:html_dynamic_folds = 1
566<
567 *g:html_no_foldcolumn*
568Default: 0.
569When 0, if |g:html_dynamic_folds| is 1, generate a column of text similar to
570Vim's foldcolumn (|fold-foldcolumn|) the user can click on to toggle folds
571open or closed. The minimum width of the generated text column is the current
572'foldcolumn' setting.
573When 1, do not generate this column; instead, hovering the mouse cursor over
574folded text will open the fold as if |g:html_hover_unfold| were set.
575>
576 :let g:html_no_foldcolumn = 1
577<
578 *TOhtml-uncopyable-text* *g:html_prevent_copy*
579Default: empty string.
580This option prevents certain regions of the generated HTML from being copied,
581when you select all text in document rendered in a browser and copy it. Useful
582for allowing users to copy-paste only the source text even if a fold column or
583line numbers are shown in the generated content. Specify regions to be
584affected in this way as follows:
585 f: fold column
586 n: line numbers (also within fold text)
587 t: fold text
588 d: diff filler
589
590Example, to make the fold column and line numbers uncopyable: >
591 :let g:html_prevent_copy = "fn"
592<
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100593The method used to prevent copying in the generated page depends on the value
594of |g:html_use_input_for_pc|.
595
596 *g:html_use_input_for_pc*
597Default: "fallback"
598If |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty, then:
599
600When "all", read-only <input> elements are used in place of normal text for
601uncopyable regions. In some browsers, especially older browsers, after
602selecting an entire page and copying the selection, the <input> tags are not
603pasted with the page text. If |g:html_no_invalid| is 0, the <input> tags have
604invalid type; this works in more browsers, but the page will not validate.
605Note: this method does NOT work in recent versions of Chrome and equivalent
606browsers; the <input> tags get pasted with the text.
607
608When "fallback" (default value), the same <input> elements are generated for
609older browsers, but newer browsers (detected by CSS feature query) hide the
610<input> elements and instead use generated content in an ::before pseudoelement
611to display the uncopyable text. This method should work with the largest
612number of browsers, both old and new.
613
614When "none", the <input> elements are not generated at all. Only the
615generated-content method is used. This means that old browsers, notably
616Internet Explorer, will either copy the text intended not to be copyable, or
617the non-copyable text may not appear at all. However, this is the most
618standards-based method, and there will be much less markup.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200619
620 *g:html_no_invalid*
621Default: 0.
Bram Moolenaar09c6f262019-11-17 15:55:14 +0100622When 0, if |g:html_prevent_copy| is non-empty and |g:html_use_input_for_pc| is
623not "none", an invalid attribute is intentionally inserted into the <input>
624element for the uncopyable areas. This prevents pasting the <input> elements
625in some applications. Specifically, some versions of Microsoft Word will not
626paste the <input> elements if they contain this invalid attribute. When 1, no
627invalid markup is inserted, and the generated page should validate. However,
628<input> elements may be pasted into some applications and can be difficult to
629remove afterward.
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200630
631 *g:html_hover_unfold*
632Default: 0.
633When 0, the only way to open a fold generated by 2html.vim with
634|g:html_dynamic_folds| set, is to click on the generated fold column.
635When 1, use CSS 2.0 to allow the user to open a fold by moving the mouse
636cursor over the displayed fold text. This is useful to allow users with
637disabled javascript to view the folded text.
638
639Note that old browsers (notably Internet Explorer 6) will not support this
640feature. Browser-specific markup for IE6 is included to fall back to the
641normal CSS1 styling so that the folds show up correctly for this browser, but
642they will not be openable without a foldcolumn.
643>
644 :let g:html_hover_unfold = 1
645<
Bram Moolenaar31c31672013-06-26 13:28:14 +0200646 *g:html_id_expr*
647Default: ""
648Dynamic folding and jumping to line IDs rely on unique IDs within the document
649to work. If generated HTML is copied into a larger document, these IDs are no
650longer guaranteed to be unique. Set g:html_id_expr to an expression Vim can
651evaluate to get a unique string to append to each ID used in a given document,
652so that the full IDs will be unique even when combined with other content in a
653larger HTML document. Example, to append _ and the buffer number to each ID: >
654
655 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_".bufnr("%")'
656<
657To append a string "_mystring" to the end of each ID: >
658
659 :let g:html_id_expr = '"_mystring"'
660<
661Note, when converting a diff view to HTML, the expression will only be
662evaluated for the first window in the diff, and the result used for all the
663windows.
664
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200665 *TOhtml-wrap-text* *g:html_pre_wrap*
666Default: current 'wrap' setting.
667When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, the text in the generated HTML does
668not wrap at the edge of the browser window.
669When 1, if |g:html_use_css| is 1, the CSS 2.0 "white-space:pre-wrap" value is
670used, causing the text to wrap at whitespace at the edge of the browser
671window.
672Explicitly enable text wrapping: >
673 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 1
674Explicitly disable wrapping: >
675 :let g:html_pre_wrap = 0
676Go back to default, determine wrapping from 'wrap' setting: >
677 :unlet g:html_pre_wrap
678<
679 *g:html_no_pre*
680Default: 0.
681When 0, buffer text in the generated HTML is surrounded by <pre>...</pre>
682tags. Series of whitespace is shown as in Vim without special markup, and tab
683characters can be included literally (see |g:html_expand_tabs|).
684When 1 (not recommended), the <pre> tags are omitted, and a plain <div> is
685used instead. Whitespace is replaced by a series of &nbsp; character
686references, and <br> is used to end each line. This is another way to allow
687text in the generated HTML is wrap (see |g:html_pre_wrap|) which also works in
688old browsers, but may cause noticeable differences between Vim's display and
689the rendered page generated by 2html.vim.
690>
691 :let g:html_no_pre = 1
692<
693 *g:html_expand_tabs*
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100694Default: 0 if 'tabstop' is 8, 'expandtab' is 0, 'vartabstop' is not in use,
695 and no fold column or line numbers occur in the generated HTML;
696 1 otherwise.
697When 1, <Tab> characters in the buffer text are replaced with an appropriate
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200698number of space characters, or &nbsp; references if |g:html_no_pre| is 1.
Bram Moolenaarf0d58ef2018-11-16 16:13:44 +0100699When 0, if |g:html_no_pre| is 0 or unset, <Tab> characters in the buffer text
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200700are included as-is in the generated HTML. This is useful for when you want to
701allow copy and paste from a browser without losing the actual whitespace in
702the source document. Note that this can easily break text alignment and
703indentation in the HTML, unless set by default.
704
705Force |2html.vim| to keep <Tab> characters: >
706 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 0
707<
708Force tabs to be expanded: >
709 :let g:html_expand_tabs = 1
710<
711 *TOhtml-encoding-detect* *TOhtml-encoding*
712It is highly recommended to set your desired encoding with
713|g:html_use_encoding| for any content which will be placed on a web server.
714
715If you do not specify an encoding, |2html.vim| uses the preferred IANA name
716for the current value of 'fileencoding' if set, or 'encoding' if not.
717'encoding' is always used for certain 'buftype' values. 'fileencoding' will be
718set to match the chosen document encoding.
719
720Automatic detection works for the encodings mentioned specifically by name in
721|encoding-names|, but TOhtml will only automatically use those encodings with
722wide browser support. However, you can override this to support specific
723encodings that may not be automatically detected by default (see options
724below). See http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets for the IANA names.
725
726Note, by default all Unicode encodings are converted to UTF-8 with no BOM in
727the generated HTML, as recommended by W3C:
728
729 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-choosing-encodings
730 http://www.w3.org/International/questions/qa-byte-order-mark
731
732 *g:html_use_encoding*
733Default: none, uses IANA name for current 'fileencoding' as above.
734To overrule all automatic charset detection, set g:html_use_encoding to the
735name of the charset to be used. It is recommended to set this variable to
736something widely supported, like UTF-8, for anything you will be hosting on a
737webserver: >
738 :let g:html_use_encoding = "UTF-8"
739You can also use this option to omit the line that specifies the charset
740entirely, by setting g:html_use_encoding to an empty string (NOT recommended): >
741 :let g:html_use_encoding = ""
742To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the |g:html_use_encoding|
743variable: >
744 :unlet g:html_use_encoding
745<
746 *g:html_encoding_override*
747Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
748 mentioned by name at |encoding-names|.
749This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the correct 'fileencoding' when you
750specify an encoding with |g:html_use_encoding| which is not in the default
751list of conversions.
752
753This is a dictionary of charset-encoding pairs that will replace existing
754pairs automatically detected by TOhtml, or supplement with new pairs.
755
756Detect the HTML charset "windows-1252" as the encoding "8bit-cp1252": >
757 :let g:html_encoding_override = {'windows-1252': '8bit-cp1252'}
758<
759 *g:html_charset_override*
760Default: none, autoload/tohtml.vim contains default conversions for encodings
761 mentioned by name at |encoding-names| and which have wide
762 browser support.
763This option allows |2html.vim| to detect the HTML charset for any
764'fileencoding' or 'encoding' which is not detected automatically. You can also
765use it to override specific existing encoding-charset pairs. For example,
766TOhtml will by default use UTF-8 for all Unicode/UCS encodings. To use UTF-16
767and UTF-32 instead, use: >
768 :let g:html_charset_override = {'ucs-4': 'UTF-32', 'utf-16': 'UTF-16'}
769
770Note that documents encoded in either UTF-32 or UTF-16 have known
771compatibility problems with some major browsers.
772
Bram Moolenaar60cce2f2015-10-13 23:21:27 +0200773 *g:html_font*
774Default: "monospace"
775You can specify the font or fonts used in the converted document using
776g:html_font. If this option is set to a string, then the value will be
777surrounded with single quotes. If this option is set to a list then each list
778item is surrounded by single quotes and the list is joined with commas. Either
779way, "monospace" is added as the fallback generic family name and the entire
780result used as the font family (using CSS) or font face (if not using CSS).
781Examples: >
782
783 " font-family: 'Consolas', monospace;
784 :let g:html_font = "Consolas"
785
786 " font-family: 'DejaVu Sans Mono', 'Consolas', monospace;
787 :let g:html_font = ["DejaVu Sans Mono", "Consolas"]
788<
Bram Moolenaar6c35bea2012-07-25 17:49:10 +0200789 *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML* *g:html_use_xhtml*
790Default: 0.
791When 0, generate standard HTML 4.01 (strict when possible).
792When 1, generate XHTML 1.0 instead (XML compliant HTML).
793>
794 :let g:html_use_xhtml = 1
795<
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100796==============================================================================
7975. Syntax file remarks *:syn-file-remarks*
798
799 *b:current_syntax-variable*
800Vim stores the name of the syntax that has been loaded in the
801"b:current_syntax" variable. You can use this if you want to load other
802settings, depending on which syntax is active. Example: >
803 :au BufReadPost * if b:current_syntax == "csh"
804 :au BufReadPost * do-some-things
805 :au BufReadPost * endif
806
807
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000808
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000809ABEL *abel.vim* *ft-abel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000810
811ABEL highlighting provides some user-defined options. To enable them, assign
812any value to the respective variable. Example: >
813 :let abel_obsolete_ok=1
814To disable them use ":unlet". Example: >
815 :unlet abel_obsolete_ok
816
817Variable Highlight ~
818abel_obsolete_ok obsolete keywords are statements, not errors
819abel_cpp_comments_illegal do not interpret '//' as inline comment leader
820
821
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000822ADA
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000823
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +0000824See |ft-ada-syntax|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000825
826
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000827ANT *ant.vim* *ft-ant-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000828
829The ant syntax file provides syntax highlighting for javascript and python
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000830by default. Syntax highlighting for other script languages can be installed
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000831by the function AntSyntaxScript(), which takes the tag name as first argument
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +0000832and the script syntax file name as second argument. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000833
834 :call AntSyntaxScript('perl', 'perl.vim')
835
836will install syntax perl highlighting for the following ant code >
837
838 <script language = 'perl'><![CDATA[
839 # everything inside is highlighted as perl
840 ]]></script>
841
842See |mysyntaxfile-add| for installing script languages permanently.
843
844
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000845APACHE *apache.vim* *ft-apache-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000846
Bram Moolenaar01164a62017-11-02 22:58:42 +0100847The apache syntax file provides syntax highlighting for Apache HTTP server
848version 2.2.3.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000849
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000850
851 *asm.vim* *asmh8300.vim* *nasm.vim* *masm.vim* *asm68k*
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000852ASSEMBLY *ft-asm-syntax* *ft-asmh8300-syntax* *ft-nasm-syntax*
853 *ft-masm-syntax* *ft-asm68k-syntax* *fasm.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000854
855Files matching "*.i" could be Progress or Assembly. If the automatic detection
856doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
857startup vimrc: >
858 :let filetype_i = "asm"
859Replace "asm" with the type of assembly you use.
860
861There are many types of assembly languages that all use the same file name
862extensions. Therefore you will have to select the type yourself, or add a
863line in the assembly file that Vim will recognize. Currently these syntax
864files are included:
865 asm GNU assembly (the default)
866 asm68k Motorola 680x0 assembly
867 asmh8300 Hitachi H-8300 version of GNU assembly
868 ia64 Intel Itanium 64
869 fasm Flat assembly (http://flatassembler.net)
870 masm Microsoft assembly (probably works for any 80x86)
871 nasm Netwide assembly
872 tasm Turbo Assembly (with opcodes 80x86 up to Pentium, and
873 MMX)
874 pic PIC assembly (currently for PIC16F84)
875
876The most flexible is to add a line in your assembly file containing: >
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100877 asmsyntax=nasm
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000878Replace "nasm" with the name of the real assembly syntax. This line must be
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +0100879one of the first five lines in the file. No non-white text must be
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +0200880immediately before or after this text. Note that specifying asmsyntax=foo is
881equivalent to setting ft=foo in a |modeline|, and that in case of a conflict
882between the two settings the one from the modeline will take precedence (in
883particular, if you have ft=asm in the modeline, you will get the GNU syntax
884highlighting regardless of what is specified as asmsyntax).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000885
886The syntax type can always be overruled for a specific buffer by setting the
887b:asmsyntax variable: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000888 :let b:asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000889
890If b:asmsyntax is not set, either automatically or by hand, then the value of
891the global variable asmsyntax is used. This can be seen as a default assembly
892language: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000893 :let asmsyntax = "nasm"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000894
895As a last resort, if nothing is defined, the "asm" syntax is used.
896
897
898Netwide assembler (nasm.vim) optional highlighting ~
899
900To enable a feature: >
901 :let {variable}=1|set syntax=nasm
902To disable a feature: >
903 :unlet {variable} |set syntax=nasm
904
905Variable Highlight ~
906nasm_loose_syntax unofficial parser allowed syntax not as Error
907 (parser dependent; not recommended)
908nasm_ctx_outside_macro contexts outside macro not as Error
909nasm_no_warn potentially risky syntax not as ToDo
910
911
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000912ASPPERL and ASPVBS *ft-aspperl-syntax* *ft-aspvbs-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000913
914*.asp and *.asa files could be either Perl or Visual Basic script. Since it's
915hard to detect this you can set two global variables to tell Vim what you are
916using. For Perl script use: >
917 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspperl"
918 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspperl"
919For Visual Basic use: >
920 :let g:filetype_asa = "aspvbs"
921 :let g:filetype_asp = "aspvbs"
922
923
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000924BAAN *baan.vim* *baan-syntax*
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000925
Bram Moolenaar53f7fcc2021-07-28 20:10:16 +0200926The baan.vim gives syntax support for BaanC of release BaanIV up to SSA ERP LN
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000927for both 3 GL and 4 GL programming. Large number of standard defines/constants
928are supported.
929
930Some special violation of coding standards will be signalled when one specify
931in ones |.vimrc|: >
932 let baan_code_stds=1
933
934*baan-folding*
935
936Syntax folding can be enabled at various levels through the variables
937mentioned below (Set those in your |.vimrc|). The more complex folding on
938source blocks and SQL can be CPU intensive.
939
940To allow any folding and enable folding at function level use: >
941 let baan_fold=1
942Folding can be enabled at source block level as if, while, for ,... The
943indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to match (spaces are not
944considered equal to a tab). >
945 let baan_fold_block=1
946Folding can be enabled for embedded SQL blocks as SELECT, SELECTDO,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000947SELECTEMPTY, ... The indentation preceding the begin/end keywords has to
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000948match (spaces are not considered equal to a tab). >
949 let baan_fold_sql=1
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +0000950Note: Block folding can result in many small folds. It is suggested to |:set|
Bram Moolenaarf193fff2006-04-27 00:02:13 +0000951the options 'foldminlines' and 'foldnestmax' in |.vimrc| or use |:setlocal| in
952.../after/syntax/baan.vim (see |after-directory|). Eg: >
953 set foldminlines=5
954 set foldnestmax=6
955
956
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000957BASIC *basic.vim* *vb.vim* *ft-basic-syntax* *ft-vb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000958
959Both Visual Basic and "normal" basic use the extension ".bas". To detect
960which one should be used, Vim checks for the string "VB_Name" in the first
961five lines of the file. If it is not found, filetype will be "basic",
962otherwise "vb". Files with the ".frm" extension will always be seen as Visual
963Basic.
964
965
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +0000966C *c.vim* *ft-c-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000967
968A few things in C highlighting are optional. To enable them assign any value
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100969(including zero) to the respective variable. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +0000970 :let c_comment_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100971 :let c_no_bracket_error = 0
972To disable them use `:unlet`. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000973 :unlet c_comment_strings
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100974Setting the value to zero doesn't work!
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000975
Bram Moolenaarba3ff532018-11-04 14:45:49 +0100976An alternative is to switch to the C++ highlighting: >
977 :set filetype=cpp
978
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000979Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200980*c_gnu* GNU gcc specific items
981*c_comment_strings* strings and numbers inside a comment
982*c_space_errors* trailing white space and spaces before a <Tab>
983*c_no_trail_space_error* ... but no trailing spaces
984*c_no_tab_space_error* ... but no spaces before a <Tab>
985*c_no_bracket_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] as errors
986*c_no_curly_error* don't highlight {}; inside [] and () as errors;
Bram Moolenaar677ee682005-01-27 14:41:15 +0000987 except { and } in first column
Bram Moolenaar09521312016-08-12 22:54:35 +0200988 Default is to highlight them, otherwise you
989 can't spot a missing ")".
Bram Moolenaar91359012019-11-30 17:57:03 +0100990*c_curly_error* highlight a missing } by finding all pairs; this
991 forces syncing from the start of the file, can be slow
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200992*c_no_ansi* don't do standard ANSI types and constants
993*c_ansi_typedefs* ... but do standard ANSI types
994*c_ansi_constants* ... but do standard ANSI constants
995*c_no_utf* don't highlight \u and \U in strings
996*c_syntax_for_h* for *.h files use C syntax instead of C++ and use objc
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +0200997 syntax instead of objcpp
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +0200998*c_no_if0* don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
999*c_no_cformat* don't highlight %-formats in strings
1000*c_no_c99* don't highlight C99 standard items
1001*c_no_c11* don't highlight C11 standard items
1002*c_no_bsd* don't highlight BSD specific types
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001003
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001004When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
1005become a fold. If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
1006 :let c_no_comment_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaarf9393ef2006-04-24 19:47:27 +00001007"#if 0" blocks are also folded, unless: >
1008 :let c_no_if0_fold = 1
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00001009
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001010If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
1011when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
1012to a larger number: >
1013 :let c_minlines = 100
1014This will make the syntax synchronization start 100 lines before the first
1015displayed line. The default value is 50 (15 when c_no_if0 is set). The
1016disadvantage of using a larger number is that redrawing can become slow.
1017
1018When using the "#if 0" / "#endif" comment highlighting, notice that this only
1019works when the "#if 0" is within "c_minlines" from the top of the window. If
1020you have a long "#if 0" construct it will not be highlighted correctly.
1021
1022To match extra items in comments, use the cCommentGroup cluster.
1023Example: >
1024 :au Syntax c call MyCadd()
1025 :function MyCadd()
1026 : syn keyword cMyItem contained Ni
1027 : syn cluster cCommentGroup add=cMyItem
1028 : hi link cMyItem Title
1029 :endfun
1030
1031ANSI constants will be highlighted with the "cConstant" group. This includes
1032"NULL", "SIG_IGN" and others. But not "TRUE", for example, because this is
1033not in the ANSI standard. If you find this confusing, remove the cConstant
1034highlighting: >
1035 :hi link cConstant NONE
1036
1037If you see '{' and '}' highlighted as an error where they are OK, reset the
1038highlighting for cErrInParen and cErrInBracket.
1039
1040If you want to use folding in your C files, you can add these lines in a file
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001041in the "after" directory in 'runtimepath'. For Unix this would be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001042~/.vim/after/syntax/c.vim. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001043 syn sync fromstart
1044 set foldmethod=syntax
1045
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001046CH *ch.vim* *ft-ch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00001047
1048C/C++ interpreter. Ch has similar syntax highlighting to C and builds upon
1049the C syntax file. See |c.vim| for all the settings that are available for C.
1050
1051By setting a variable you can tell Vim to use Ch syntax for *.h files, instead
1052of C or C++: >
1053 :let ch_syntax_for_h = 1
1054
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001055
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001056CHILL *chill.vim* *ft-chill-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001057
1058Chill syntax highlighting is similar to C. See |c.vim| for all the settings
1059that are available. Additionally there is:
1060
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001061chill_space_errors like c_space_errors
1062chill_comment_string like c_comment_strings
1063chill_minlines like c_minlines
1064
1065
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001066CHANGELOG *changelog.vim* *ft-changelog-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001067
1068ChangeLog supports highlighting spaces at the start of a line.
1069If you do not like this, add following line to your .vimrc: >
1070 let g:changelog_spacing_errors = 0
1071This works the next time you edit a changelog file. You can also use
1072"b:changelog_spacing_errors" to set this per buffer (before loading the syntax
1073file).
1074
1075You can change the highlighting used, e.g., to flag the spaces as an error: >
1076 :hi link ChangelogError Error
1077Or to avoid the highlighting: >
1078 :hi link ChangelogError NONE
1079This works immediately.
1080
1081
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001082CLOJURE *ft-clojure-syntax*
1083
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001084 *g:clojure_syntax_keywords*
1085
1086Syntax highlighting of public vars in "clojure.core" is provided by default,
1087but additional symbols can be highlighted by adding them to the
1088|g:clojure_syntax_keywords| variable. The value should be a |Dictionary| of
1089syntax group names, each containing a |List| of identifiers.
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001090>
1091 let g:clojure_syntax_keywords = {
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001092 \ 'clojureMacro': ["defproject", "defcustom"],
1093 \ 'clojureFunc': ["string/join", "string/replace"]
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001094 \ }
1095<
1096Refer to the Clojure syntax script for valid syntax group names.
1097
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001098There is also *b:clojure_syntax_keywords* which is a buffer-local variant of
1099this variable intended for use by plugin authors to highlight symbols
1100dynamically.
Bram Moolenaar6f1d9a02016-07-24 14:12:38 +02001101
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001102By setting the *b:clojure_syntax_without_core_keywords* variable, vars from
1103"clojure.core" will not be highlighted by default. This is useful for
1104namespaces that have set `(:refer-clojure :only [])`
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001105
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001106
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001107 *g:clojure_fold*
1108
1109Setting |g:clojure_fold| to `1` will enable the folding of Clojure code. Any
1110list, vector or map that extends over more than one line can be folded using
1111the standard Vim |fold-commands|.
1112
1113
1114 *g:clojure_discard_macro*
1115
1116Set this variable to `1` to enable basic highlighting of Clojure's "discard
1117reader macro".
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001118>
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001119 #_(defn foo [x]
1120 (println x))
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001121<
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00001122Note that this option will not correctly highlight stacked discard macros
1123(e.g. `#_#_`).
1124
Bram Moolenaar76f3b1a2014-03-27 22:30:07 +01001125
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001126COBOL *cobol.vim* *ft-cobol-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001127
1128COBOL highlighting has different needs for legacy code than it does for fresh
1129development. This is due to differences in what is being done (maintenance
1130versus development) and other factors. To enable legacy code highlighting,
1131add this line to your .vimrc: >
1132 :let cobol_legacy_code = 1
1133To disable it again, use this: >
1134 :unlet cobol_legacy_code
1135
1136
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001137COLD FUSION *coldfusion.vim* *ft-coldfusion-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001138
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001139The ColdFusion has its own version of HTML comments. To turn on ColdFusion
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001140comment highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1141
1142 :let html_wrong_comments = 1
1143
1144The ColdFusion syntax file is based on the HTML syntax file.
1145
1146
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001147CPP *cpp.vim* *ft-cpp-syntax*
1148
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001149Most things are the same as |ft-c-syntax|.
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001150
1151Variable Highlight ~
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01001152cpp_no_cpp11 don't highlight C++11 standard items
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01001153cpp_no_cpp14 don't highlight C++14 standard items
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02001154cpp_no_cpp17 don't highlight C++17 standard items
1155cpp_no_cpp20 don't highlight C++20 standard items
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01001156
1157
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001158CSH *csh.vim* *ft-csh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001159
1160This covers the shell named "csh". Note that on some systems tcsh is actually
1161used.
1162
1163Detecting whether a file is csh or tcsh is notoriously hard. Some systems
1164symlink /bin/csh to /bin/tcsh, making it almost impossible to distinguish
1165between csh and tcsh. In case VIM guesses wrong you can set the
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001166"filetype_csh" variable. For using csh: *g:filetype_csh*
1167>
1168 :let g:filetype_csh = "csh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001169
1170For using tcsh: >
1171
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02001172 :let g:filetype_csh = "tcsh"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001173
1174Any script with a tcsh extension or a standard tcsh filename (.tcshrc,
1175tcsh.tcshrc, tcsh.login) will have filetype tcsh. All other tcsh/csh scripts
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001176will be classified as tcsh, UNLESS the "filetype_csh" variable exists. If the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001177"filetype_csh" variable exists, the filetype will be set to the value of the
1178variable.
1179
1180
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001181CYNLIB *cynlib.vim* *ft-cynlib-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001182
1183Cynlib files are C++ files that use the Cynlib class library to enable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001184hardware modelling and simulation using C++. Typically Cynlib files have a .cc
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001185or a .cpp extension, which makes it very difficult to distinguish them from a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001186normal C++ file. Thus, to enable Cynlib highlighting for .cc files, add this
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001187line to your .vimrc file: >
1188
1189 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cc=1
1190
1191Similarly for cpp files (this extension is only usually used in Windows) >
1192
1193 :let cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp=1
1194
1195To disable these again, use this: >
1196
1197 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cc
1198 :unlet cynlib_cyntax_for_cpp
1199<
1200
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001201CWEB *cweb.vim* *ft-cweb-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001202
1203Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
1204doesn't work for you, or you don't edit Progress at all, use this in your
1205startup vimrc: >
1206 :let filetype_w = "cweb"
1207
1208
Bram Moolenaar96f45c02019-10-26 19:53:45 +02001209DART *dart.vim* *ft-dart-syntax*
1210
1211Dart is an object-oriented, typed, class defined, garbage collected language
1212used for developing mobile, desktop, web, and back-end applications. Dart uses
1213a C-like syntax derived from C, Java, and JavaScript, with features adopted
1214from Smalltalk, Python, Ruby, and others.
1215
1216More information about the language and its development environment at the
1217official Dart language website at https://dart.dev
1218
1219dart.vim syntax detects and highlights Dart statements, reserved words,
1220type declarations, storage classes, conditionals, loops, interpolated values,
1221and comments. There is no support idioms from Flutter or any other Dart
1222framework.
1223
1224Changes, fixes? Submit an issue or pull request via:
1225
1226https://github.com/pr3d4t0r/dart-vim-syntax/
1227
1228
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001229DESKTOP *desktop.vim* *ft-desktop-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001230
1231Primary goal of this syntax file is to highlight .desktop and .directory files
Bram Moolenaara17d4c12010-05-30 18:30:36 +02001232according to freedesktop.org standard:
Bram Moolenaar65e0d772020-06-14 17:29:55 +02001233https://specifications.freedesktop.org/desktop-entry-spec/latest/
1234To highlight nonstandard extensions that does not begin with X-, set >
1235 let g:desktop_enable_nonstd = 1
1236Note that this may cause wrong highlight.
1237To highlight KDE-reserved features, set >
1238 let g:desktop_enable_kde = 1
1239g:desktop_enable_kde follows g:desktop_enable_nonstd if not supplied
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001240
1241
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001242DIFF *diff.vim*
1243
1244The diff highlighting normally finds translated headers. This can be slow if
1245there are very long lines in the file. To disable translations: >
1246
1247 :let diff_translations = 0
1248
Bram Moolenaar0122c402015-02-03 19:13:34 +01001249Also see |diff-slow|.
1250
Bram Moolenaar8feef4f2015-01-07 16:57:10 +01001251
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001252DIRCOLORS *dircolors.vim* *ft-dircolors-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001253
1254The dircolors utility highlighting definition has one option. It exists to
1255provide compatibility with the Slackware GNU/Linux distributions version of
1256the command. It adds a few keywords that are generally ignored by most
1257versions. On Slackware systems, however, the utility accepts the keywords and
1258uses them for processing. To enable the Slackware keywords add the following
1259line to your startup file: >
1260 let dircolors_is_slackware = 1
1261
1262
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001263DOCBOOK *docbk.vim* *ft-docbk-syntax* *docbook*
Bram Moolenaar81af9252010-12-10 20:35:50 +01001264DOCBOOK XML *docbkxml.vim* *ft-docbkxml-syntax*
1265DOCBOOK SGML *docbksgml.vim* *ft-docbksgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001266
1267There are two types of DocBook files: SGML and XML. To specify what type you
1268are using the "b:docbk_type" variable should be set. Vim does this for you
1269automatically if it can recognize the type. When Vim can't guess it the type
1270defaults to XML.
1271You can set the type manually: >
1272 :let docbk_type = "sgml"
1273or: >
1274 :let docbk_type = "xml"
1275You need to do this before loading the syntax file, which is complicated.
1276Simpler is setting the filetype to "docbkxml" or "docbksgml": >
1277 :set filetype=docbksgml
1278or: >
1279 :set filetype=docbkxml
1280
Bram Moolenaar2df58b42012-11-28 18:21:11 +01001281You can specify the DocBook version: >
1282 :let docbk_ver = 3
1283When not set 4 is used.
1284
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001285
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001286DOSBATCH *dosbatch.vim* *ft-dosbatch-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001287
1288There is one option with highlighting DOS batch files. This covers new
1289extensions to the Command Interpreter introduced with Windows 2000 and
1290is controlled by the variable dosbatch_cmdextversion. For Windows NT
1291this should have the value 1, and for Windows 2000 it should be 2.
1292Select the version you want with the following line: >
1293
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001294 :let dosbatch_cmdextversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001295
1296If this variable is not defined it defaults to a value of 2 to support
1297Windows 2000.
1298
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001299A second option covers whether *.btm files should be detected as type
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001300"dosbatch" (MS-DOS batch files) or type "btm" (4DOS batch files). The latter
1301is used by default. You may select the former with the following line: >
Bram Moolenaar8299df92004-07-10 09:47:34 +00001302
1303 :let g:dosbatch_syntax_for_btm = 1
1304
1305If this variable is undefined or zero, btm syntax is selected.
1306
1307
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001308DOXYGEN *doxygen.vim* *doxygen-syntax*
1309
1310Doxygen generates code documentation using a special documentation format
Bram Moolenaare37d50a2008-08-06 17:06:04 +00001311(similar to Javadoc). This syntax script adds doxygen highlighting to c, cpp,
1312idl and php files, and should also work with java.
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001313
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001314There are a few of ways to turn on doxygen formatting. It can be done
1315explicitly or in a modeline by appending '.doxygen' to the syntax of the file.
1316Example: >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001317 :set syntax=c.doxygen
1318or >
1319 // vim:syntax=c.doxygen
1320
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01001321It can also be done automatically for C, C++, C#, IDL and PHP files by setting
1322the global or buffer-local variable load_doxygen_syntax. This is done by
1323adding the following to your .vimrc. >
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001324 :let g:load_doxygen_syntax=1
1325
Bram Moolenaar06b5d512010-05-22 15:37:44 +02001326There are a couple of variables that have an effect on syntax highlighting, and
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001327are to do with non-standard highlighting options.
1328
1329Variable Default Effect ~
1330g:doxygen_enhanced_color
1331g:doxygen_enhanced_colour 0 Use non-standard highlighting for
1332 doxygen comments.
1333
1334doxygen_my_rendering 0 Disable rendering of HTML bold, italic
1335 and html_my_rendering underline.
1336
1337doxygen_javadoc_autobrief 1 Set to 0 to disable javadoc autobrief
1338 colour highlighting.
1339
1340doxygen_end_punctuation '[.]' Set to regexp match for the ending
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00001341 punctuation of brief
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001342
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02001343There are also some highlight groups worth mentioning as they can be useful in
Bram Moolenaar8cacf352006-04-15 20:27:24 +00001344configuration.
1345
1346Highlight Effect ~
1347doxygenErrorComment The colour of an end-comment when missing
1348 punctuation in a code, verbatim or dot section
1349doxygenLinkError The colour of an end-comment when missing the
1350 \endlink from a \link section.
1351
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001352
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001353DTD *dtd.vim* *ft-dtd-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001354
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001355The DTD syntax highlighting is case sensitive by default. To disable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001356case-sensitive highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1357
1358 :let dtd_ignore_case=1
1359
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001360The DTD syntax file will highlight unknown tags as errors. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001361this is annoying, it can be turned off by setting: >
1362
1363 :let dtd_no_tag_errors=1
1364
1365before sourcing the dtd.vim syntax file.
1366Parameter entity names are highlighted in the definition using the
1367'Type' highlighting group and 'Comment' for punctuation and '%'.
1368Parameter entity instances are highlighted using the 'Constant'
1369highlighting group and the 'Type' highlighting group for the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001370delimiters % and ;. This can be turned off by setting: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001371
1372 :let dtd_no_param_entities=1
1373
1374The DTD syntax file is also included by xml.vim to highlight included dtd's.
1375
1376
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001377EIFFEL *eiffel.vim* *ft-eiffel-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001378
1379While Eiffel is not case-sensitive, its style guidelines are, and the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001380syntax highlighting file encourages their use. This also allows to
1381highlight class names differently. If you want to disable case-sensitive
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001382highlighting, add the following line to your startup file: >
1383
1384 :let eiffel_ignore_case=1
1385
1386Case still matters for class names and TODO marks in comments.
1387
1388Conversely, for even stricter checks, add one of the following lines: >
1389
1390 :let eiffel_strict=1
1391 :let eiffel_pedantic=1
1392
1393Setting eiffel_strict will only catch improper capitalization for the
1394five predefined words "Current", "Void", "Result", "Precursor", and
1395"NONE", to warn against their accidental use as feature or class names.
1396
1397Setting eiffel_pedantic will enforce adherence to the Eiffel style
1398guidelines fairly rigorously (like arbitrary mixes of upper- and
1399lowercase letters as well as outdated ways to capitalize keywords).
1400
1401If you want to use the lower-case version of "Current", "Void",
1402"Result", and "Precursor", you can use >
1403
1404 :let eiffel_lower_case_predef=1
1405
1406instead of completely turning case-sensitive highlighting off.
1407
1408Support for ISE's proposed new creation syntax that is already
1409experimentally handled by some compilers can be enabled by: >
1410
1411 :let eiffel_ise=1
1412
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001413Finally, some vendors support hexadecimal constants. To handle them, add >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001414
1415 :let eiffel_hex_constants=1
1416
1417to your startup file.
1418
1419
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001420EUPHORIA *euphoria3.vim* *euphoria4.vim* *ft-euphoria-syntax*
1421
Bram Moolenaar7ff78462020-07-10 22:00:53 +02001422Two syntax highlighting files exist for Euphoria. One for Euphoria
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001423version 3.1.1, which is the default syntax highlighting file, and one for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001424Euphoria version 4.0.5 or later.
1425
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001426Euphoria version 3.1.1 (http://www.rapideuphoria.com/) is still necessary
1427for developing applications for the DOS platform, which Euphoria version 4
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001428(http://www.openeuphoria.org/) does not support.
1429
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001430The following file extensions are auto-detected as Euphoria file type:
1431
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001432 *.e, *.eu, *.ew, *.ex, *.exu, *.exw
1433 *.E, *.EU, *.EW, *.EX, *.EXU, *.EXW
1434
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01001435To select syntax highlighting file for Euphoria, as well as for
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001436auto-detecting the *.e and *.E file extensions as Euphoria file type,
1437add the following line to your startup file: >
1438
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001439 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria3"
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001440
Bram Moolenaar4d8f4762021-06-27 15:18:56 +02001441< or >
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001442
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001443 :let g:filetype_euphoria = "euphoria4"
1444
1445Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1446specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1447file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1448filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1449Elixir.
Bram Moolenaar08589172014-03-08 18:38:28 +01001450
1451
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001452ERLANG *erlang.vim* *ft-erlang-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001453
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001454Erlang is a functional programming language developed by Ericsson. Files with
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02001455the following extensions are recognized as Erlang files: erl, hrl, yaws.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001456
Bram Moolenaarad3b3662013-05-17 18:14:19 +02001457The BIFs (built-in functions) are highlighted by default. To disable this,
1458put the following line in your vimrc: >
1459
1460 :let g:erlang_highlight_bifs = 0
1461
1462To enable highlighting some special atoms, put this in your vimrc: >
1463
1464 :let g:erlang_highlight_special_atoms = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001465
1466
Bram Moolenaar90df4b92021-07-07 20:26:08 +02001467ELIXIR *elixir.vim* *ft-elixir-syntax*
1468
1469Elixir is a dynamic, functional language for building scalable and maintainable
1470applications.
1471
1472The following file extensions are auto-detected as Elixir file types:
1473
1474 *.ex, *.exs, *.eex, *.leex, *.lock
1475
1476Elixir and Euphoria share the *.ex file extension. If the filetype is
1477specifically set as Euphoria with the g:filetype_euphoria variable, or the
1478file is determined to be Euphoria based on keywords in the file, then the
1479filetype will be set as Euphoria. Otherwise, the filetype will default to
1480Elixir.
1481
1482
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001483FLEXWIKI *flexwiki.vim* *ft-flexwiki-syntax*
1484
1485FlexWiki is an ASP.NET-based wiki package available at http://www.flexwiki.com
Bram Moolenaar446beb42011-05-10 17:18:44 +02001486NOTE: this site currently doesn't work, on Wikipedia is mentioned that
1487development stopped in 2009.
Bram Moolenaard68071d2006-05-02 22:08:30 +00001488
1489Syntax highlighting is available for the most common elements of FlexWiki
1490syntax. The associated ftplugin script sets some buffer-local options to make
1491editing FlexWiki pages more convenient. FlexWiki considers a newline as the
1492start of a new paragraph, so the ftplugin sets 'tw'=0 (unlimited line length),
1493'wrap' (wrap long lines instead of using horizontal scrolling), 'linebreak'
1494(to wrap at a character in 'breakat' instead of at the last char on screen),
1495and so on. It also includes some keymaps that are disabled by default.
1496
1497If you want to enable the keymaps that make "j" and "k" and the cursor keys
1498move up and down by display lines, add this to your .vimrc: >
1499 :let flexwiki_maps = 1
1500
1501
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001502FORM *form.vim* *ft-form-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001503
1504The coloring scheme for syntax elements in the FORM file uses the default
1505modes Conditional, Number, Statement, Comment, PreProc, Type, and String,
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00001506following the language specifications in 'Symbolic Manipulation with FORM' by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001507J.A.M. Vermaseren, CAN, Netherlands, 1991.
1508
1509If you want include your own changes to the default colors, you have to
1510redefine the following syntax groups:
1511
1512 - formConditional
1513 - formNumber
1514 - formStatement
1515 - formHeaderStatement
1516 - formComment
1517 - formPreProc
1518 - formDirective
1519 - formType
1520 - formString
1521
1522Note that the form.vim syntax file implements FORM preprocessor commands and
1523directives per default in the same syntax group.
1524
1525A predefined enhanced color mode for FORM is available to distinguish between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001526header statements and statements in the body of a FORM program. To activate
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001527this mode define the following variable in your vimrc file >
1528
1529 :let form_enhanced_color=1
1530
1531The enhanced mode also takes advantage of additional color features for a dark
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001532gvim display. Here, statements are colored LightYellow instead of Yellow, and
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001533conditionals are LightBlue for better distinction.
1534
1535
Bram Moolenaar3d14c0f2021-11-27 17:22:07 +00001536FORTH *forth.vim* *ft-forth-syntax*
1537
1538Files matching "*.fs" could be F# or Forth. If the automatic detection
1539doesn't work for you, or you don't edit F# at all, use this in your
1540startup vimrc: >
1541 :let filetype_fs = "forth"
1542
1543
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001544FORTRAN *fortran.vim* *ft-fortran-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001545
1546Default highlighting and dialect ~
Bram Moolenaar6ee8d892012-01-10 14:55:01 +01001547Highlighting appropriate for Fortran 2008 is used by default. This choice
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001548should be appropriate for most users most of the time because Fortran 2008 is
1549almost a superset of previous versions (Fortran 2003, 95, 90, and 77).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001550
1551Fortran source code form ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001552Fortran code can be in either fixed or free source form. Note that the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001553syntax highlighting will not be correct if the form is incorrectly set.
1554
1555When you create a new fortran file, the syntax script assumes fixed source
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001556form. If you always use free source form, then >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001557 :let fortran_free_source=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001558in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command. If you always use fixed source
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001559form, then >
1560 :let fortran_fixed_source=1
1561in your .vimrc prior to the :syntax on command.
1562
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001563If the form of the source code depends, in a non-standard way, upon the file
1564extension, then it is most convenient to set fortran_free_source in a ftplugin
1565file. For more information on ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. Note that this
1566will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command precedes the "syntax
1567on" command in your .vimrc file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001568
1569When you edit an existing fortran file, the syntax script will assume free
1570source form if the fortran_free_source variable has been set, and assumes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001571fixed source form if the fortran_fixed_source variable has been set. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001572neither of these variables have been set, the syntax script attempts to
Bram Moolenaar256972a2015-12-29 19:10:25 +01001573determine which source form has been used by examining the file extension
1574using conventions common to the ifort, gfortran, Cray, NAG, and PathScale
1575compilers (.f, .for, .f77 for fixed-source, .f90, .f95, .f03, .f08 for
1576free-source). If none of this works, then the script examines the first five
1577columns of the first 500 lines of your file. If no signs of free source form
1578are detected, then the file is assumed to be in fixed source form. The
1579algorithm should work in the vast majority of cases. In some cases, such as a
1580file that begins with 500 or more full-line comments, the script may
1581incorrectly decide that the fortran code is in fixed form. If that happens,
1582just add a non-comment statement beginning anywhere in the first five columns
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01001583of the first twenty-five lines, save (:w) and then reload (:e!) the file.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001584
1585Tabs in fortran files ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001586Tabs are not recognized by the Fortran standards. Tabs are not a good idea in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001587fixed format fortran source code which requires fixed column boundaries.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001588Therefore, tabs are marked as errors. Nevertheless, some programmers like
1589using tabs. If your fortran files contain tabs, then you should set the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001590variable fortran_have_tabs in your .vimrc with a command such as >
1591 :let fortran_have_tabs=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001592placed prior to the :syntax on command. Unfortunately, the use of tabs will
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001593mean that the syntax file will not be able to detect incorrect margins.
1594
1595Syntax folding of fortran files ~
1596If you wish to use foldmethod=syntax, then you must first set the variable
1597fortran_fold with a command such as >
1598 :let fortran_fold=1
1599to instruct the syntax script to define fold regions for program units, that
1600is main programs starting with a program statement, subroutines, function
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001601subprograms, block data subprograms, interface blocks, and modules. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001602also set the variable fortran_fold_conditionals with a command such as >
1603 :let fortran_fold_conditionals=1
1604then fold regions will also be defined for do loops, if blocks, and select
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001605case constructs. If you also set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001606fortran_fold_multilinecomments with a command such as >
1607 :let fortran_fold_multilinecomments=1
1608then fold regions will also be defined for three or more consecutive comment
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001609lines. Note that defining fold regions can be slow for large files.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001610
1611If fortran_fold, and possibly fortran_fold_conditionals and/or
1612fortran_fold_multilinecomments, have been set, then vim will fold your file if
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001613you set foldmethod=syntax. Comments or blank lines placed between two program
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001614units are not folded because they are seen as not belonging to any program
1615unit.
1616
1617More precise fortran syntax ~
1618If you set the variable fortran_more_precise with a command such as >
1619 :let fortran_more_precise=1
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001620then the syntax coloring will be more precise but slower. In particular,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001621statement labels used in do, goto and arithmetic if statements will be
1622recognized, as will construct names at the end of a do, if, select or forall
1623construct.
1624
1625Non-default fortran dialects ~
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001626The syntax script supports two Fortran dialects: f08 and F. You will probably
1627find the default highlighting (f08) satisfactory. A few legacy constructs
1628deleted or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard are highlighted as todo
1629items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001630
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001631If you use F, the advantage of setting the dialect appropriately is that
1632other legacy features excluded from F will be highlighted as todo items and
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001633that free source form will be assumed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001634
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001635The dialect can be selected in various ways. If all your fortran files use
1636the same dialect, set the global variable fortran_dialect in your .vimrc prior
1637to your syntax on statement. The case-sensitive, permissible values of
1638fortran_dialect are "f08" or "F". Invalid values of fortran_dialect are
1639ignored.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001640
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001641If the dialect depends upon the file extension, then it is most convenient to
1642set a buffer-local variable in a ftplugin file. For more information on
1643ftplugin files, see |ftplugin|. For example, if all your fortran files with
1644an .f90 extension are written in the F subset, your ftplugin file should
1645contain the code >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001646 let s:extfname = expand("%:e")
1647 if s:extfname ==? "f90"
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001648 let b:fortran_dialect="F"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001649 else
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001650 unlet! b:fortran_dialect
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001651 endif
1652Note that this will work only if the "filetype plugin indent on" command
1653precedes the "syntax on" command in your .vimrc file.
1654
1655Finer control is necessary if the file extension does not uniquely identify
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001656the dialect. You can override the default dialect, on a file-by-file basis,
1657by including a comment with the directive "fortran_dialect=xx" (where xx=F or
1658f08) in one of the first three lines in your file. For example, your older .f
1659files may be legacy code but your newer ones may be F codes, and you would
1660identify the latter by including in the first three lines of those files a
1661Fortran comment of the form >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001662 ! fortran_dialect=F
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001663
1664For previous versions of the syntax, you may have set fortran_dialect to the
1665now-obsolete values "f77", "f90", "f95", or "elf". Such settings will be
1666silently handled as "f08". Users of "elf" may wish to experiment with "F"
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001667instead.
Bram Moolenaar6be7f872012-01-20 21:08:56 +01001668
1669The syntax/fortran.vim script contains embedded comments that tell you how to
1670comment and/or uncomment some lines to (a) activate recognition of some
1671non-standard, vendor-supplied intrinsics and (b) to prevent features deleted
1672or declared obsolescent in the 2008 standard from being highlighted as todo
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02001673items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001674
1675Limitations ~
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001676Parenthesis checking does not catch too few closing parentheses. Hollerith
1677strings are not recognized. Some keywords may be highlighted incorrectly
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001678because Fortran90 has no reserved words.
1679
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001680For further information related to fortran, see |ft-fortran-indent| and
1681|ft-fortran-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001682
1683
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001684FVWM CONFIGURATION FILES *fvwm.vim* *ft-fvwm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001685
1686In order for Vim to recognize Fvwm configuration files that do not match
1687the patterns *fvwmrc* or *fvwm2rc* , you must put additional patterns
1688appropriate to your system in your myfiletypes.vim file. For these
1689patterns, you must set the variable "b:fvwm_version" to the major version
1690number of Fvwm, and the 'filetype' option to fvwm.
1691
1692For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/X11/fvwm2/
1693as Fvwm2 configuration files, add the following: >
1694
1695 :au! BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/X11/fvwm2/* let b:fvwm_version = 2 |
1696 \ set filetype=fvwm
1697
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001698GSP *gsp.vim* *ft-gsp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001699
1700The default coloring style for GSP pages is defined by |html.vim|, and
1701the coloring for java code (within java tags or inline between backticks)
1702is defined by |java.vim|. The following HTML groups defined in |html.vim|
1703are redefined to incorporate and highlight inline java code:
1704
1705 htmlString
1706 htmlValue
1707 htmlEndTag
1708 htmlTag
1709 htmlTagN
1710
1711Highlighting should look fine most of the places where you'd see inline
1712java code, but in some special cases it may not. To add another HTML
1713group where you will have inline java code where it does not highlight
1714correctly, just copy the line you want from |html.vim| and add gspJava
1715to the contains clause.
1716
1717The backticks for inline java are highlighted according to the htmlError
1718group to make them easier to see.
1719
1720
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001721GROFF *groff.vim* *ft-groff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001722
1723The groff syntax file is a wrapper for |nroff.vim|, see the notes
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001724under that heading for examples of use and configuration. The purpose
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001725of this wrapper is to set up groff syntax extensions by setting the
1726filetype from a |modeline| or in a personal filetype definitions file
1727(see |filetype.txt|).
1728
1729
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001730HASKELL *haskell.vim* *lhaskell.vim* *ft-haskell-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001731
1732The Haskell syntax files support plain Haskell code as well as literate
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001733Haskell code, the latter in both Bird style and TeX style. The Haskell
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001734syntax highlighting will also highlight C preprocessor directives.
1735
1736If you want to highlight delimiter characters (useful if you have a
1737light-coloured background), add to your .vimrc: >
1738 :let hs_highlight_delimiters = 1
1739To treat True and False as keywords as opposed to ordinary identifiers,
1740add: >
1741 :let hs_highlight_boolean = 1
1742To also treat the names of primitive types as keywords: >
1743 :let hs_highlight_types = 1
1744And to treat the names of even more relatively common types as keywords: >
1745 :let hs_highlight_more_types = 1
1746If you want to highlight the names of debugging functions, put in
1747your .vimrc: >
1748 :let hs_highlight_debug = 1
1749
1750The Haskell syntax highlighting also highlights C preprocessor
1751directives, and flags lines that start with # but are not valid
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001752directives as erroneous. This interferes with Haskell's syntax for
1753operators, as they may start with #. If you want to highlight those
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001754as operators as opposed to errors, put in your .vimrc: >
1755 :let hs_allow_hash_operator = 1
1756
1757The syntax highlighting for literate Haskell code will try to
1758automatically guess whether your literate Haskell code contains
1759TeX markup or not, and correspondingly highlight TeX constructs
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001760or nothing at all. You can override this globally by putting
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001761in your .vimrc >
1762 :let lhs_markup = none
1763for no highlighting at all, or >
1764 :let lhs_markup = tex
1765to force the highlighting to always try to highlight TeX markup.
1766For more flexibility, you may also use buffer local versions of
1767this variable, so e.g. >
1768 :let b:lhs_markup = tex
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001769will force TeX highlighting for a particular buffer. It has to be
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001770set before turning syntax highlighting on for the buffer or
1771loading a file.
1772
1773
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001774HTML *html.vim* *ft-html-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001775
1776The coloring scheme for tags in the HTML file works as follows.
1777
1778The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
1779This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01001780closing tags the 'Identifier' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those
1781are defined for you)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001782
1783Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
1784names are colored with the same color as the <> or </> respectively which
1785makes it easy to spot errors
1786
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001787Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001788names are colored differently than unknown ones.
1789
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001790Some HTML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001791are recognized by the html.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
1792text is shown: <B> <I> <U> <EM> <STRONG> (<EM> is used as an alias for <I>,
1793while <STRONG> as an alias for <B>), <H1> - <H6>, <HEAD>, <TITLE> and <A>, but
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001794only if used as a link (that is, it must include a href as in
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001795<A href="somefile.html">).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001796
1797If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
1798following syntax groups:
1799
1800 - htmlBold
1801 - htmlBoldUnderline
1802 - htmlBoldUnderlineItalic
1803 - htmlUnderline
1804 - htmlUnderlineItalic
1805 - htmlItalic
1806 - htmlTitle for titles
1807 - htmlH1 - htmlH6 for headings
1808
1809To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all with the exception
1810of the last two (htmlTitle and htmlH[1-6], which are optional) and define the
1811following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
1812are read during initialization) >
1813 :let html_my_rendering=1
1814
1815If you'd like to see an example download mysyntax.vim at
1816http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html
1817
1818You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
1819vimrc file: >
1820 :let html_no_rendering=1
1821
1822HTML comments are rather special (see an HTML reference document for the
1823details), and the syntax coloring scheme will highlight all errors.
1824However, if you prefer to use the wrong style (starts with <!-- and
Bram Moolenaar8bb1c3e2014-07-04 16:43:17 +02001825ends with -->) you can define >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001826 :let html_wrong_comments=1
1827
1828JavaScript and Visual Basic embedded inside HTML documents are highlighted as
1829'Special' with statements, comments, strings and so on colored as in standard
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001830programming languages. Note that only JavaScript and Visual Basic are currently
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001831supported, no other scripting language has been added yet.
1832
1833Embedded and inlined cascading style sheets (CSS) are highlighted too.
1834
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001835There are several html preprocessor languages out there. html.vim has been
1836written such that it should be trivial to include it. To do so add the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001837following two lines to the syntax coloring file for that language
1838(the example comes from the asp.vim file):
Bram Moolenaar30e9b3c2019-09-07 16:24:12 +02001839>
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001840 runtime! syntax/html.vim
1841 syn cluster htmlPreproc add=asp
1842
1843Now you just need to make sure that you add all regions that contain
1844the preprocessor language to the cluster htmlPreproc.
1845
1846
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001847HTML/OS (by Aestiva) *htmlos.vim* *ft-htmlos-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001848
1849The coloring scheme for HTML/OS works as follows:
1850
1851Functions and variable names are the same color by default, because VIM
1852doesn't specify different colors for Functions and Identifiers. To change
1853this (which is recommended if you want function names to be recognizable in a
1854different color) you need to add the following line to either your ~/.vimrc: >
1855 :hi Function term=underline cterm=bold ctermfg=LightGray
1856
1857Of course, the ctermfg can be a different color if you choose.
1858
1859Another issues that HTML/OS runs into is that there is no special filetype to
1860signify that it is a file with HTML/OS coding. You can change this by opening
1861a file and turning on HTML/OS syntax by doing the following: >
1862 :set syntax=htmlos
1863
1864Lastly, it should be noted that the opening and closing characters to begin a
1865block of HTML/OS code can either be << or [[ and >> or ]], respectively.
1866
1867
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001868IA64 *ia64.vim* *intel-itanium* *ft-ia64-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001869
1870Highlighting for the Intel Itanium 64 assembly language. See |asm.vim| for
1871how to recognize this filetype.
1872
1873To have *.inc files be recognized as IA64, add this to your .vimrc file: >
1874 :let g:filetype_inc = "ia64"
1875
1876
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001877INFORM *inform.vim* *ft-inform-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001878
1879Inform highlighting includes symbols provided by the Inform Library, as
1880most programs make extensive use of it. If do not wish Library symbols
1881to be highlighted add this to your vim startup: >
1882 :let inform_highlight_simple=1
1883
1884By default it is assumed that Inform programs are Z-machine targeted,
1885and highlights Z-machine assembly language symbols appropriately. If
1886you intend your program to be targeted to a Glulx/Glk environment you
1887need to add this to your startup sequence: >
1888 :let inform_highlight_glulx=1
1889
1890This will highlight Glulx opcodes instead, and also adds glk() to the
1891set of highlighted system functions.
1892
1893The Inform compiler will flag certain obsolete keywords as errors when
1894it encounters them. These keywords are normally highlighted as errors
1895by Vim. To prevent such error highlighting, you must add this to your
1896startup sequence: >
1897 :let inform_suppress_obsolete=1
1898
1899By default, the language features highlighted conform to Compiler
1900version 6.30 and Library version 6.11. If you are using an older
1901Inform development environment, you may with to add this to your
1902startup sequence: >
1903 :let inform_highlight_old=1
1904
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001905IDL *idl.vim* *idl-syntax*
1906
1907IDL (Interface Definition Language) files are used to define RPC calls. In
1908Microsoft land, this is also used for defining COM interfaces and calls.
1909
1910IDL's structure is simple enough to permit a full grammar based approach to
1911rather than using a few heuristics. The result is large and somewhat
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00001912repetitive but seems to work.
Bram Moolenaar9e54a0e2006-04-14 20:42:25 +00001913
1914There are some Microsoft extensions to idl files that are here. Some of them
1915are disabled by defining idl_no_ms_extensions.
1916
1917The more complex of the extensions are disabled by defining idl_no_extensions.
1918
1919Variable Effect ~
1920
1921idl_no_ms_extensions Disable some of the Microsoft specific
1922 extensions
1923idl_no_extensions Disable complex extensions
1924idlsyntax_showerror Show IDL errors (can be rather intrusive, but
1925 quite helpful)
1926idlsyntax_showerror_soft Use softer colours by default for errors
1927
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001928
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00001929JAVA *java.vim* *ft-java-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001930
1931The java.vim syntax highlighting file offers several options:
1932
1933In Java 1.0.2 it was never possible to have braces inside parens, so this was
1934flagged as an error. Since Java 1.1 this is possible (with anonymous
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001935classes), and therefore is no longer marked as an error. If you prefer the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001936way, put the following line into your vim startup file: >
1937 :let java_mark_braces_in_parens_as_errors=1
1938
1939All identifiers in java.lang.* are always visible in all classes. To
1940highlight them use: >
1941 :let java_highlight_java_lang_ids=1
1942
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001943You can also highlight identifiers of most standard Java packages if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001944download the javaid.vim script at http://www.fleiner.com/vim/download.html.
1945If you prefer to only highlight identifiers of a certain package, say java.io
1946use the following: >
1947 :let java_highlight_java_io=1
1948Check the javaid.vim file for a list of all the packages that are supported.
1949
1950Function names are not highlighted, as the way to find functions depends on
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001951how you write Java code. The syntax file knows two possible ways to highlight
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001952functions:
1953
1954If you write function declarations that are always indented by either
1955a tab, 8 spaces or 2 spaces you may want to set >
1956 :let java_highlight_functions="indent"
1957However, if you follow the Java guidelines about how functions and classes are
1958supposed to be named (with respect to upper and lowercase), use >
1959 :let java_highlight_functions="style"
1960If both options do not work for you, but you would still want function
1961declarations to be highlighted create your own definitions by changing the
1962definitions in java.vim or by creating your own java.vim which includes the
1963original one and then adds the code to highlight functions.
1964
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001965In Java 1.1 the functions System.out.println() and System.err.println() should
Bram Moolenaared203462004-06-16 11:19:22 +00001966only be used for debugging. Therefore it is possible to highlight debugging
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001967statements differently. To do this you must add the following definition in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001968your startup file: >
1969 :let java_highlight_debug=1
1970The result will be that those statements are highlighted as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001971characters. If you prefer to have them highlighted differently you must define
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001972new highlightings for the following groups.:
1973 Debug, DebugSpecial, DebugString, DebugBoolean, DebugType
1974which are used for the statement itself, special characters used in debug
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001975strings, strings, boolean constants and types (this, super) respectively. I
Bram Moolenaar2547aa92020-07-26 17:00:44 +02001976have opted to choose another background for those statements.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001977
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001978Javadoc is a program that takes special comments out of Java program files and
1979creates HTML pages. The standard configuration will highlight this HTML code
1980similarly to HTML files (see |html.vim|). You can even add Javascript
1981and CSS inside this code (see below). There are four differences however:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001982 1. The title (all characters up to the first '.' which is followed by
1983 some white space or up to the first '@') is colored differently (to change
1984 the color change the group CommentTitle).
1985 2. The text is colored as 'Comment'.
1986 3. HTML comments are colored as 'Special'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001987 4. The special Javadoc tags (@see, @param, ...) are highlighted as specials
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001988 and the argument (for @see, @param, @exception) as Function.
1989To turn this feature off add the following line to your startup file: >
1990 :let java_ignore_javadoc=1
1991
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00001992If you use the special Javadoc comment highlighting described above you
1993can also turn on special highlighting for Javascript, visual basic
1994scripts and embedded CSS (stylesheets). This makes only sense if you
1995actually have Javadoc comments that include either Javascript or embedded
1996CSS. The options to use are >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001997 :let java_javascript=1
1998 :let java_css=1
1999 :let java_vb=1
2000
2001In order to highlight nested parens with different colors define colors
2002for javaParen, javaParen1 and javaParen2, for example with >
2003 :hi link javaParen Comment
2004or >
2005 :hi javaParen ctermfg=blue guifg=#0000ff
2006
2007If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2008when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "java_minlines" internal variable
2009to a larger number: >
2010 :let java_minlines = 50
2011This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2012displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2013number is that redrawing can become slow.
2014
2015
Bram Moolenaar589edb32019-09-20 14:38:13 +02002016JSON *json.vim* *ft-json-syntax*
2017
2018The json syntax file provides syntax highlighting with conceal support by
2019default. To disable concealment: >
2020 let g:vim_json_conceal = 0
2021
2022To disable syntax highlighting of errors: >
2023 let g:vim_json_warnings = 0
2024
2025
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002026LACE *lace.vim* *ft-lace-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002027
2028Lace (Language for Assembly of Classes in Eiffel) is case insensitive, but the
2029style guide lines are not. If you prefer case insensitive highlighting, just
2030define the vim variable 'lace_case_insensitive' in your startup file: >
2031 :let lace_case_insensitive=1
2032
2033
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002034LEX *lex.vim* *ft-lex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002035
2036Lex uses brute-force synchronizing as the "^%%$" section delimiter
2037gives no clue as to what section follows. Consequently, the value for >
2038 :syn sync minlines=300
2039may be changed by the user if s/he is experiencing synchronization
2040difficulties (such as may happen with large lex files).
2041
2042
Bram Moolenaar6fc45b52010-07-25 17:42:45 +02002043LIFELINES *lifelines.vim* *ft-lifelines-syntax*
2044
2045To highlight deprecated functions as errors, add in your .vimrc: >
2046
2047 :let g:lifelines_deprecated = 1
2048<
2049
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002050LISP *lisp.vim* *ft-lisp-syntax*
2051
2052The lisp syntax highlighting provides two options: >
2053
2054 g:lisp_instring : if it exists, then "(...)" strings are highlighted
2055 as if the contents of the string were lisp.
2056 Useful for AutoLisp.
2057 g:lisp_rainbow : if it exists and is nonzero, then differing levels
2058 of parenthesization will receive different
2059 highlighting.
2060<
2061The g:lisp_rainbow option provides 10 levels of individual colorization for
2062the parentheses and backquoted parentheses. Because of the quantity of
2063colorization levels, unlike non-rainbow highlighting, the rainbow mode
2064specifies its highlighting using ctermfg and guifg, thereby bypassing the
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02002065usual color scheme control using standard highlighting groups. The actual
Bram Moolenaara5fac542005-10-12 20:58:49 +00002066highlighting used depends on the dark/bright setting (see |'bg'|).
2067
2068
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002069LITE *lite.vim* *ft-lite-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002070
2071There are two options for the lite syntax highlighting.
2072
2073If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2074
2075 :let lite_sql_query = 1
2076
2077For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2078set "lite_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2079
2080 :let lite_minlines = 200
2081
2082
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002083LPC *lpc.vim* *ft-lpc-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002084
Bram Moolenaard2f3a8b2018-06-19 14:35:59 +02002085LPC stands for a simple, memory-efficient language: Lars Pensjö C. The
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002086file name of LPC is usually *.c. Recognizing these files as LPC would bother
2087users writing only C programs. If you want to use LPC syntax in Vim, you
2088should set a variable in your .vimrc file: >
2089
2090 :let lpc_syntax_for_c = 1
2091
2092If it doesn't work properly for some particular C or LPC files, use a
2093modeline. For a LPC file:
2094
2095 // vim:set ft=lpc:
2096
2097For a C file that is recognized as LPC:
2098
2099 // vim:set ft=c:
2100
2101If you don't want to set the variable, use the modeline in EVERY LPC file.
2102
2103There are several implementations for LPC, we intend to support most widely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002104used ones. Here the default LPC syntax is for MudOS series, for MudOS v22
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002105and before, you should turn off the sensible modifiers, and this will also
Bram Moolenaar7e38ea22014-04-05 22:55:53 +02002106assert the new efuns after v22 to be invalid, don't set this variable when
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002107you are using the latest version of MudOS: >
2108
2109 :let lpc_pre_v22 = 1
2110
2111For LpMud 3.2 series of LPC: >
2112
2113 :let lpc_compat_32 = 1
2114
2115For LPC4 series of LPC: >
2116
2117 :let lpc_use_lpc4_syntax = 1
2118
2119For uLPC series of LPC:
2120uLPC has been developed to Pike, so you should use Pike syntax
2121instead, and the name of your source file should be *.pike
2122
2123
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002124LUA *lua.vim* *ft-lua-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002125
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +01002126The Lua syntax file can be used for versions 4.0, 5.0, 5.1 and 5.2 (5.2 is
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002127the default). You can select one of these versions using the global variables
2128lua_version and lua_subversion. For example, to activate Lua
Bram Moolenaar5dc62522012-02-13 00:05:22 +010021295.1 syntax highlighting, set the variables like this:
Bram Moolenaarfc1421e2006-04-20 22:17:20 +00002130
2131 :let lua_version = 5
2132 :let lua_subversion = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002133
2134
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002135MAIL *mail.vim* *ft-mail.vim*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002136
2137Vim highlights all the standard elements of an email (headers, signatures,
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002138quoted text and URLs / email addresses). In keeping with standard conventions,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002139signatures begin in a line containing only "--" followed optionally by
2140whitespaces and end with a newline.
2141
2142Vim treats lines beginning with ']', '}', '|', '>' or a word followed by '>'
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002143as quoted text. However Vim highlights headers and signatures in quoted text
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002144only if the text is quoted with '>' (optionally followed by one space).
2145
2146By default mail.vim synchronises syntax to 100 lines before the first
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002147displayed line. If you have a slow machine, and generally deal with emails
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002148with short headers, you can change this to a smaller value: >
2149
2150 :let mail_minlines = 30
2151
2152
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002153MAKE *make.vim* *ft-make-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002154
2155In makefiles, commands are usually highlighted to make it easy for you to spot
2156errors. However, this may be too much coloring for you. You can turn this
2157feature off by using: >
2158
2159 :let make_no_commands = 1
2160
2161
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002162MAPLE *maple.vim* *ft-maple-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002163
2164Maple V, by Waterloo Maple Inc, supports symbolic algebra. The language
2165supports many packages of functions which are selectively loaded by the user.
2166The standard set of packages' functions as supplied in Maple V release 4 may be
2167highlighted at the user's discretion. Users may place in their .vimrc file: >
2168
2169 :let mvpkg_all= 1
2170
2171to get all package functions highlighted, or users may select any subset by
2172choosing a variable/package from the table below and setting that variable to
21731, also in their .vimrc file (prior to sourcing
2174$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim).
2175
2176 Table of Maple V Package Function Selectors >
2177 mv_DEtools mv_genfunc mv_networks mv_process
2178 mv_Galois mv_geometry mv_numapprox mv_simplex
2179 mv_GaussInt mv_grobner mv_numtheory mv_stats
2180 mv_LREtools mv_group mv_orthopoly mv_student
2181 mv_combinat mv_inttrans mv_padic mv_sumtools
2182 mv_combstruct mv_liesymm mv_plots mv_tensor
2183 mv_difforms mv_linalg mv_plottools mv_totorder
2184 mv_finance mv_logic mv_powseries
2185
2186
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002187MATHEMATICA *mma.vim* *ft-mma-syntax* *ft-mathematica-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar34cdc3e2005-05-18 22:24:46 +00002188
2189Empty *.m files will automatically be presumed to be Matlab files unless you
2190have the following in your .vimrc: >
2191
2192 let filetype_m = "mma"
2193
2194
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002195MOO *moo.vim* *ft-moo-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002196
2197If you use C-style comments inside expressions and find it mangles your
2198highlighting, you may want to use extended (slow!) matches for C-style
2199comments: >
2200
2201 :let moo_extended_cstyle_comments = 1
2202
2203To disable highlighting of pronoun substitution patterns inside strings: >
2204
2205 :let moo_no_pronoun_sub = 1
2206
2207To disable highlighting of the regular expression operator '%|', and matching
2208'%(' and '%)' inside strings: >
2209
2210 :let moo_no_regexp = 1
2211
2212Unmatched double quotes can be recognized and highlighted as errors: >
2213
2214 :let moo_unmatched_quotes = 1
2215
2216To highlight builtin properties (.name, .location, .programmer etc.): >
2217
2218 :let moo_builtin_properties = 1
2219
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002220Unknown builtin functions can be recognized and highlighted as errors. If you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002221use this option, add your own extensions to the mooKnownBuiltinFunction group.
2222To enable this option: >
2223
2224 :let moo_unknown_builtin_functions = 1
2225
2226An example of adding sprintf() to the list of known builtin functions: >
2227
2228 :syn keyword mooKnownBuiltinFunction sprintf contained
2229
2230
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002231MSQL *msql.vim* *ft-msql-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002232
2233There are two options for the msql syntax highlighting.
2234
2235If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2236
2237 :let msql_sql_query = 1
2238
2239For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2240set "msql_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2241
2242 :let msql_minlines = 200
2243
2244
Bram Moolenaarc572da52017-08-27 16:52:01 +02002245N1QL *n1ql.vim* *ft-n1ql-syntax*
2246
2247N1QL is a SQL-like declarative language for manipulating JSON documents in
2248Couchbase Server databases.
2249
2250Vim syntax highlights N1QL statements, keywords, operators, types, comments,
2251and special values. Vim ignores syntactical elements specific to SQL or its
2252many dialects, like COLUMN or CHAR, that don't exist in N1QL.
2253
2254
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002255NCF *ncf.vim* *ft-ncf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002256
2257There is one option for NCF syntax highlighting.
2258
2259If you want to have unrecognized (by ncf.vim) statements highlighted as
2260errors, use this: >
2261
2262 :let ncf_highlight_unknowns = 1
2263
2264If you don't want to highlight these errors, leave it unset.
2265
2266
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002267NROFF *nroff.vim* *ft-nroff-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002268
2269The nroff syntax file works with AT&T n/troff out of the box. You need to
2270activate the GNU groff extra features included in the syntax file before you
2271can use them.
2272
2273For example, Linux and BSD distributions use groff as their default text
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002274processing package. In order to activate the extra syntax highlighting
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002275features for groff, arrange for files to be recognized as groff (see
2276|ft-groff-syntax|) or add the following option to your start-up files: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002277
Bram Moolenaardad44732021-03-31 20:07:33 +02002278 :let nroff_is_groff = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002279
2280Groff is different from the old AT&T n/troff that you may still find in
2281Solaris. Groff macro and request names can be longer than 2 characters and
2282there are extensions to the language primitives. For example, in AT&T troff
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002283you access the year as a 2-digit number with the request \(yr. In groff you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002284can use the same request, recognized for compatibility, or you can use groff's
2285native syntax, \[yr]. Furthermore, you can use a 4-digit year directly:
2286\[year]. Macro requests can be longer than 2 characters, for example, GNU mm
2287accepts the requests ".VERBON" and ".VERBOFF" for creating verbatim
2288environments.
2289
2290In order to obtain the best formatted output g/troff can give you, you should
2291follow a few simple rules about spacing and punctuation.
2292
22931. Do not leave empty spaces at the end of lines.
2294
22952. Leave one space and one space only after an end-of-sentence period,
2296 exclamation mark, etc.
2297
22983. For reasons stated below, it is best to follow all period marks with a
2299 carriage return.
2300
2301The reason behind these unusual tips is that g/n/troff have a line breaking
2302algorithm that can be easily upset if you don't follow the rules given above.
2303
2304Unlike TeX, troff fills text line-by-line, not paragraph-by-paragraph and,
2305furthermore, it does not have a concept of glue or stretch, all horizontal and
2306vertical space input will be output as is.
2307
2308Therefore, you should be careful about not using more space between sentences
2309than you intend to have in your final document. For this reason, the common
2310practice is to insert a carriage return immediately after all punctuation
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002311marks. If you want to have "even" text in your final processed output, you
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02002312need to maintain regular spacing in the input text. To mark both trailing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002313spaces and two or more spaces after a punctuation as an error, use: >
2314
2315 :let nroff_space_errors = 1
2316
2317Another technique to detect extra spacing and other errors that will interfere
2318with the correct typesetting of your file, is to define an eye-catching
2319highlighting definition for the syntax groups "nroffDefinition" and
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002320"nroffDefSpecial" in your configuration files. For example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002321
2322 hi def nroffDefinition term=italic cterm=italic gui=reverse
2323 hi def nroffDefSpecial term=italic,bold cterm=italic,bold
2324 \ gui=reverse,bold
2325
2326If you want to navigate preprocessor entries in your source file as easily as
2327with section markers, you can activate the following option in your .vimrc
2328file: >
2329
2330 let b:preprocs_as_sections = 1
2331
Bram Moolenaar69a7cb42004-06-20 12:51:53 +00002332As well, the syntax file adds an extra paragraph marker for the extended
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002333paragraph macro (.XP) in the ms package.
2334
2335Finally, there is a |groff.vim| syntax file that can be used for enabling
2336groff syntax highlighting either on a file basis or globally by default.
2337
2338
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002339OCAML *ocaml.vim* *ft-ocaml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002340
2341The OCaml syntax file handles files having the following prefixes: .ml,
2342.mli, .mll and .mly. By setting the following variable >
2343
2344 :let ocaml_revised = 1
2345
2346you can switch from standard OCaml-syntax to revised syntax as supported
2347by the camlp4 preprocessor. Setting the variable >
2348
2349 :let ocaml_noend_error = 1
2350
2351prevents highlighting of "end" as error, which is useful when sources
2352contain very long structures that Vim does not synchronize anymore.
2353
2354
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002355PAPP *papp.vim* *ft-papp-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002356
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002357The PApp syntax file handles .papp files and, to a lesser extent, .pxml
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002358and .pxsl files which are all a mixture of perl/xml/html/other using xml
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002359as the top-level file format. By default everything inside phtml or pxml
2360sections is treated as a string with embedded preprocessor commands. If
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002361you set the variable: >
2362
2363 :let papp_include_html=1
2364
2365in your startup file it will try to syntax-hilight html code inside phtml
2366sections, but this is relatively slow and much too colourful to be able to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002367edit sensibly. ;)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002368
2369The newest version of the papp.vim syntax file can usually be found at
2370http://papp.plan9.de.
2371
2372
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002373PASCAL *pascal.vim* *ft-pascal-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002374
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002375Files matching "*.p" could be Progress or Pascal and those matching "*.pp"
2376could be Puppet or Pascal. If the automatic detection doesn't work for you,
2377or you only edit Pascal files, use this in your startup vimrc: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002378
Bram Moolenaar98a29d02021-01-18 19:55:44 +01002379 :let filetype_p = "pascal"
2380 :let filetype_pp = "pascal"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002381
2382The Pascal syntax file has been extended to take into account some extensions
2383provided by Turbo Pascal, Free Pascal Compiler and GNU Pascal Compiler.
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002384Delphi keywords are also supported. By default, Turbo Pascal 7.0 features are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002385enabled. If you prefer to stick with the standard Pascal keywords, add the
2386following line to your startup file: >
2387
2388 :let pascal_traditional=1
2389
2390To switch on Delphi specific constructions (such as one-line comments,
2391keywords, etc): >
2392
2393 :let pascal_delphi=1
2394
2395
2396The option pascal_symbol_operator controls whether symbol operators such as +,
2397*, .., etc. are displayed using the Operator color or not. To colorize symbol
2398operators, add the following line to your startup file: >
2399
2400 :let pascal_symbol_operator=1
2401
2402Some functions are highlighted by default. To switch it off: >
2403
2404 :let pascal_no_functions=1
2405
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02002406Furthermore, there are specific variables for some compilers. Besides
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002407pascal_delphi, there are pascal_gpc and pascal_fpc. Default extensions try to
2408match Turbo Pascal. >
2409
2410 :let pascal_gpc=1
2411
2412or >
2413
2414 :let pascal_fpc=1
2415
2416To ensure that strings are defined on a single line, you can define the
2417pascal_one_line_string variable. >
2418
2419 :let pascal_one_line_string=1
2420
2421If you dislike <Tab> chars, you can set the pascal_no_tabs variable. Tabs
2422will be highlighted as Error. >
2423
2424 :let pascal_no_tabs=1
2425
2426
2427
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002428PERL *perl.vim* *ft-perl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002429
2430There are a number of possible options to the perl syntax highlighting.
2431
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002432Inline POD highlighting is now turned on by default. If you don't wish
2433to have the added complexity of highlighting POD embedded within Perl
2434files, you may set the 'perl_include_pod' option to 0: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002435
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002436 :let perl_include_pod = 0
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002437
Bram Moolenaar822ff862014-06-12 21:46:14 +02002438To reduce the complexity of parsing (and increase performance) you can switch
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002439off two elements in the parsing of variable names and contents. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002440
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002441To handle package references in variable and function names not differently
2442from the rest of the name (like 'PkgName::' in '$PkgName::VarName'): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002443
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002444 :let perl_no_scope_in_variables = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002445
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002446(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_want_scope_in_variables"
2447enabled it.)
2448
2449If you do not want complex things like '@{${"foo"}}' to be parsed: >
2450
2451 :let perl_no_extended_vars = 1
2452
Bram Moolenaar3fdfa4a2004-10-07 21:02:47 +00002453(In Vim 6.x it was the other way around: "perl_extended_vars" enabled it.)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002454
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002455The coloring strings can be changed. By default strings and qq friends will be
2456highlighted like the first line. If you set the variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002457perl_string_as_statement, it will be highlighted as in the second line.
2458
2459 "hello world!"; qq|hello world|;
2460 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^NN^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^N (unlet perl_string_as_statement)
2461 S^^^^^^^^^^^^SNNSSS^^^^^^^^^^^SN (let perl_string_as_statement)
2462
2463(^ = perlString, S = perlStatement, N = None at all)
2464
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002465The syncing has 3 options. The first two switch off some triggering of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002466synchronization and should only be needed in case it fails to work properly.
2467If while scrolling all of a sudden the whole screen changes color completely
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002468then you should try and switch off one of those. Let me know if you can figure
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002469out the line that causes the mistake.
2470
2471One triggers on "^\s*sub\s*" and the other on "^[$@%]" more or less. >
2472
2473 :let perl_no_sync_on_sub
2474 :let perl_no_sync_on_global_var
2475
2476Below you can set the maximum distance VIM should look for starting points for
2477its attempts in syntax highlighting. >
2478
2479 :let perl_sync_dist = 100
2480
2481If you want to use folding with perl, set perl_fold: >
2482
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002483 :let perl_fold = 1
2484
2485If you want to fold blocks in if statements, etc. as well set the following: >
2486
2487 :let perl_fold_blocks = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002488
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002489Subroutines are folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. If you do not want
2490this, you can set 'perl_nofold_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002491
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002492 :let perl_nofold_subs = 1
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002493
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002494Anonymous subroutines are not folded by default; you may enable their folding
2495via 'perl_fold_anonymous_subs': >
Bram Moolenaar8ada17c2006-01-19 22:16:24 +00002496
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002497 :let perl_fold_anonymous_subs = 1
2498
2499Packages are also folded by default if 'perl_fold' is set. To disable this
2500behavior, set 'perl_nofold_packages': >
2501
2502 :let perl_nofold_packages = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002503
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002504PHP3 and PHP4 *php.vim* *php3.vim* *ft-php-syntax* *ft-php3-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002505
2506[note: previously this was called "php3", but since it now also supports php4
2507it has been renamed to "php"]
2508
2509There are the following options for the php syntax highlighting.
2510
2511If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings: >
2512
2513 let php_sql_query = 1
2514
2515For highlighting the Baselib methods: >
2516
2517 let php_baselib = 1
2518
2519Enable HTML syntax highlighting inside strings: >
2520
2521 let php_htmlInStrings = 1
2522
2523Using the old colorstyle: >
2524
2525 let php_oldStyle = 1
2526
2527Enable highlighting ASP-style short tags: >
2528
2529 let php_asp_tags = 1
2530
2531Disable short tags: >
2532
2533 let php_noShortTags = 1
2534
2535For highlighting parent error ] or ): >
2536
2537 let php_parent_error_close = 1
2538
Bram Moolenaar543b7ef2013-06-01 14:50:56 +02002539For skipping a php end tag, if there exists an open ( or [ without a closing
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002540one: >
2541
2542 let php_parent_error_open = 1
2543
2544Enable folding for classes and functions: >
2545
2546 let php_folding = 1
2547
2548Selecting syncing method: >
2549
2550 let php_sync_method = x
2551
2552x = -1 to sync by search (default),
2553x > 0 to sync at least x lines backwards,
2554x = 0 to sync from start.
2555
2556
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002557PLAINTEX *plaintex.vim* *ft-plaintex-syntax*
2558
2559TeX is a typesetting language, and plaintex is the file type for the "plain"
2560variant of TeX. If you never want your *.tex files recognized as plain TeX,
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00002561see |ft-tex-plugin|.
Bram Moolenaard2cec5b2006-03-28 21:08:56 +00002562
2563This syntax file has the option >
2564
2565 let g:plaintex_delimiters = 1
2566
2567if you want to highlight brackets "[]" and braces "{}".
2568
2569
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002570PPWIZARD *ppwiz.vim* *ft-ppwiz-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002571
2572PPWizard is a preprocessor for HTML and OS/2 INF files
2573
2574This syntax file has the options:
2575
2576- ppwiz_highlight_defs : determines highlighting mode for PPWizard's
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002577 definitions. Possible values are
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002578
2579 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 1 : PPWizard #define statements retain the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002580 colors of their contents (e.g. PPWizard macros and variables)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002581
2582 ppwiz_highlight_defs = 2 : preprocessor #define and #evaluate
2583 statements are shown in a single color with the exception of line
2584 continuation symbols
2585
2586 The default setting for ppwiz_highlight_defs is 1.
2587
2588- ppwiz_with_html : If the value is 1 (the default), highlight literal
2589 HTML code; if 0, treat HTML code like ordinary text.
2590
2591
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002592PHTML *phtml.vim* *ft-phtml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002593
2594There are two options for the phtml syntax highlighting.
2595
2596If you like SQL syntax highlighting inside Strings, use this: >
2597
2598 :let phtml_sql_query = 1
2599
2600For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
2601set "phtml_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
2602
2603 :let phtml_minlines = 200
2604
2605
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002606POSTSCRIPT *postscr.vim* *ft-postscr-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002607
2608There are several options when it comes to highlighting PostScript.
2609
2610First which version of the PostScript language to highlight. There are
2611currently three defined language versions, or levels. Level 1 is the original
2612and base version, and includes all extensions prior to the release of level 2.
2613Level 2 is the most common version around, and includes its own set of
2614extensions prior to the release of level 3. Level 3 is currently the highest
2615level supported. You select which level of the PostScript language you want
2616highlighted by defining the postscr_level variable as follows: >
2617
2618 :let postscr_level=2
2619
2620If this variable is not defined it defaults to 2 (level 2) since this is
2621the most prevalent version currently.
2622
2623Note, not all PS interpreters will support all language features for a
2624particular language level. In particular the %!PS-Adobe-3.0 at the start of
2625PS files does NOT mean the PostScript present is level 3 PostScript!
2626
2627If you are working with Display PostScript, you can include highlighting of
2628Display PS language features by defining the postscr_display variable as
2629follows: >
2630
2631 :let postscr_display=1
2632
2633If you are working with Ghostscript, you can include highlighting of
2634Ghostscript specific language features by defining the variable
2635postscr_ghostscript as follows: >
2636
2637 :let postscr_ghostscript=1
2638
2639PostScript is a large language, with many predefined elements. While it
2640useful to have all these elements highlighted, on slower machines this can
2641cause Vim to slow down. In an attempt to be machine friendly font names and
2642character encodings are not highlighted by default. Unless you are working
2643explicitly with either of these this should be ok. If you want them to be
2644highlighted you should set one or both of the following variables: >
2645
2646 :let postscr_fonts=1
2647 :let postscr_encodings=1
2648
2649There is a stylistic option to the highlighting of and, or, and not. In
2650PostScript the function of these operators depends on the types of their
2651operands - if the operands are booleans then they are the logical operators,
2652if they are integers then they are binary operators. As binary and logical
2653operators can be highlighted differently they have to be highlighted one way
2654or the other. By default they are treated as logical operators. They can be
2655highlighted as binary operators by defining the variable
2656postscr_andornot_binary as follows: >
2657
2658 :let postscr_andornot_binary=1
2659<
2660
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002661 *ptcap.vim* *ft-printcap-syntax*
2662PRINTCAP + TERMCAP *ft-ptcap-syntax* *ft-termcap-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002663
2664This syntax file applies to the printcap and termcap databases.
2665
2666In order for Vim to recognize printcap/termcap files that do not match
2667the patterns *printcap*, or *termcap*, you must put additional patterns
2668appropriate to your system in your |myfiletypefile| file. For these
2669patterns, you must set the variable "b:ptcap_type" to either "print" or
2670"term", and then the 'filetype' option to ptcap.
2671
2672For example, to make Vim identify all files in /etc/termcaps/ as termcap
2673files, add the following: >
2674
2675 :au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/termcaps/* let b:ptcap_type = "term" |
2676 \ set filetype=ptcap
2677
2678If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which
2679are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "ptcap_minlines"
2680internal variable to a larger number: >
2681
2682 :let ptcap_minlines = 50
2683
2684(The default is 20 lines.)
2685
2686
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002687PROGRESS *progress.vim* *ft-progress-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002688
2689Files matching "*.w" could be Progress or cweb. If the automatic detection
2690doesn't work for you, or you don't edit cweb at all, use this in your
2691startup vimrc: >
2692 :let filetype_w = "progress"
2693The same happens for "*.i", which could be assembly, and "*.p", which could be
2694Pascal. Use this if you don't use assembly and Pascal: >
2695 :let filetype_i = "progress"
2696 :let filetype_p = "progress"
2697
2698
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002699PYTHON *python.vim* *ft-python-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002700
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002701There are six options to control Python syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002702
2703For highlighted numbers: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002704 :let python_no_number_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002705
2706For highlighted builtin functions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002707 :let python_no_builtin_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002708
2709For highlighted standard exceptions: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002710 :let python_no_exception_highlight = 1
2711
2712For highlighted doctests and code inside: >
2713 :let python_no_doctest_highlight = 1
2714or >
2715 :let python_no_doctest_code_highlight = 1
2716(first option implies second one).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002717
Bram Moolenaar4a748032010-09-30 21:47:56 +02002718For highlighted trailing whitespace and mix of spaces and tabs: >
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002719 :let python_space_error_highlight = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002720
2721If you want all possible Python highlighting (the same as setting the
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002722preceding last option and unsetting all other ones): >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002723 :let python_highlight_all = 1
2724
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02002725Note: only existence of these options matter, not their value. You can replace
Bram Moolenaar34700a62013-03-07 13:20:54 +01002726 1 above with anything.
2727
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002728QUAKE *quake.vim* *ft-quake-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002729
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01002730The Quake syntax definition should work for most FPS (First Person Shooter)
2731based on one of the Quake engines. However, the command names vary a bit
2732between the three games (Quake, Quake 2, and Quake 3 Arena) so the syntax
2733definition checks for the existence of three global variables to allow users
2734to specify what commands are legal in their files. The three variables can
2735be set for the following effects:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002736
2737set to highlight commands only available in Quake: >
2738 :let quake_is_quake1 = 1
2739
2740set to highlight commands only available in Quake 2: >
2741 :let quake_is_quake2 = 1
2742
2743set to highlight commands only available in Quake 3 Arena: >
2744 :let quake_is_quake3 = 1
2745
2746Any combination of these three variables is legal, but might highlight more
2747commands than are actually available to you by the game.
2748
2749
Bram Moolenaarfc65cab2018-08-28 22:58:02 +02002750R *r.vim* *ft-r-syntax*
2751
2752The parsing of R code for syntax highlight starts 40 lines backwards, but you
2753can set a different value in your |vimrc|. Example: >
2754 let r_syntax_minlines = 60
2755
2756You can also turn off syntax highlighting of ROxygen: >
2757 let r_syntax_hl_roxygen = 0
2758
2759enable folding of code delimited by parentheses, square brackets and curly
2760braces: >
2761 let r_syntax_folding = 1
2762
2763and highlight as functions all keywords followed by an opening parenthesis: >
2764 let r_syntax_fun_pattern = 1
2765
2766
2767R MARKDOWN *rmd.vim* *ft-rmd-syntax*
2768
2769To disable syntax highlight of YAML header, add to your |vimrc|: >
2770 let rmd_syn_hl_yaml = 0
2771
2772To disable syntax highlighting of citation keys: >
2773 let rmd_syn_hl_citations = 0
2774
2775To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers: >
2776 let rmd_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2777
2778By default, chunks of R code will be highlighted following the rules of R
2779language. If you want proper syntax highlighting of chunks of other languages,
2780you should add them to either `markdown_fenced_languages` or
2781`rmd_fenced_languages`. For example to properly highlight both R and Python,
2782you may add this to your |vimrc|: >
2783 let rmd_fenced_languages = ['r', 'python']
2784
2785
2786R RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rrst.vim* *ft-rrst-syntax*
2787
2788To highlight R code in knitr chunk headers, add to your |vimrc|: >
2789 let rrst_syn_hl_chunk = 1
2790
2791
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002792READLINE *readline.vim* *ft-readline-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002793
2794The readline library is primarily used by the BASH shell, which adds quite a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002795few commands and options to the ones already available. To highlight these
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002796items as well you can add the following to your |vimrc| or just type it in the
2797command line before loading a file with the readline syntax: >
2798 let readline_has_bash = 1
2799
2800This will add highlighting for the commands that BASH (version 2.05a and
2801later, and part earlier) adds.
2802
2803
Bram Moolenaar95a9dd12019-12-19 22:12:03 +01002804REGO *rego.vim* *ft-rego-syntax*
2805
2806Rego is a query language developed by Styra. It is mostly used as a policy
2807language for kubernetes, but can be applied to almost anything. Files with
2808the following extensions are recognized as rego files: .rego.
2809
2810
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002811RESTRUCTURED TEXT *rst.vim* *ft-rst-syntax*
2812
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002813Syntax highlighting is enabled for code blocks within the document for a
2814select number of file types. See $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/rst.vim for the default
2815syntax list.
2816
2817To set a user-defined list of code block syntax highlighting: >
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002818 let rst_syntax_code_list = ['vim', 'lisp', ...]
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002819
2820To assign multiple code block types to a single syntax, define
2821`rst_syntax_code_list` as a mapping: >
2822 let rst_syntax_code_list = {
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002823 \ 'cpp': ['cpp', 'c++'],
2824 \ 'bash': ['bash', 'sh'],
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002825 ...
Bram Moolenaar0c0734d2019-11-26 21:44:46 +01002826 \ }
Bram Moolenaar4c05fa02019-01-01 15:32:17 +01002827
2828To use color highlighting for emphasis text: >
2829 let rst_use_emphasis_colors = 1
2830
2831To enable folding of sections: >
2832 let rst_fold_enabled = 1
2833
2834Note that folding can cause performance issues on some platforms.
2835
Bram Moolenaar97d62492012-11-15 21:28:22 +01002836
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002837REXX *rexx.vim* *ft-rexx-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002838
2839If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
2840when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "rexx_minlines" internal variable
2841to a larger number: >
2842 :let rexx_minlines = 50
2843This will make the syntax synchronization start 50 lines before the first
2844displayed line. The default value is 10. The disadvantage of using a larger
2845number is that redrawing can become slow.
2846
Bram Moolenaar97293012011-07-18 19:40:27 +02002847Vim tries to guess what type a ".r" file is. If it can't be detected (from
2848comment lines), the default is "r". To make the default rexx add this line to
2849your .vimrc: *g:filetype_r*
2850>
2851 :let g:filetype_r = "r"
2852
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002853
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002854RUBY *ruby.vim* *ft-ruby-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002855
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002856 Ruby: Operator highlighting |ruby_operators|
2857 Ruby: Whitespace errors |ruby_space_errors|
2858 Ruby: Folding |ruby_fold| |ruby_foldable_groups|
2859 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations |ruby_no_expensive| |ruby_minlines|
2860 Ruby: Spellchecking strings |ruby_spellcheck_strings|
2861
2862 *ruby_operators*
2863 Ruby: Operator highlighting ~
2864
2865Operators can be highlighted by defining "ruby_operators": >
2866
2867 :let ruby_operators = 1
2868<
2869 *ruby_space_errors*
2870 Ruby: Whitespace errors ~
2871
2872Whitespace errors can be highlighted by defining "ruby_space_errors": >
2873
2874 :let ruby_space_errors = 1
2875<
2876This will highlight trailing whitespace and tabs preceded by a space character
2877as errors. This can be refined by defining "ruby_no_trail_space_error" and
2878"ruby_no_tab_space_error" which will ignore trailing whitespace and tabs after
2879spaces respectively.
2880
2881 *ruby_fold* *ruby_foldable_groups*
2882 Ruby: Folding ~
2883
2884Folding can be enabled by defining "ruby_fold": >
2885
2886 :let ruby_fold = 1
2887<
2888This will set the value of 'foldmethod' to "syntax" locally to the current
2889buffer or window, which will enable syntax-based folding when editing Ruby
2890filetypes.
2891
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002892Default folding is rather detailed, i.e., small syntax units like "if", "do",
2893"%w[]" may create corresponding fold levels.
2894
2895You can set "ruby_foldable_groups" to restrict which groups are foldable: >
2896
2897 :let ruby_foldable_groups = 'if case %'
2898<
2899The value is a space-separated list of keywords:
2900
2901 keyword meaning ~
2902 -------- ------------------------------------- ~
2903 ALL Most block syntax (default)
2904 NONE Nothing
2905 if "if" or "unless" block
2906 def "def" block
2907 class "class" block
2908 module "module" block
2909 do "do" block
2910 begin "begin" block
2911 case "case" block
2912 for "for", "while", "until" loops
2913 { Curly bracket block or hash literal
2914 [ Array literal
2915 % Literal with "%" notation, e.g.: %w(STRING), %!STRING!
2916 / Regexp
2917 string String and shell command output (surrounded by ', ", `)
2918 : Symbol
2919 # Multiline comment
2920 << Here documents
2921 __END__ Source code after "__END__" directive
2922
2923 *ruby_no_expensive*
2924 Ruby: Reducing expensive operations ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002925
2926By default, the "end" keyword is colorized according to the opening statement
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002927of the block it closes. While useful, this feature can be expensive; if you
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002928experience slow redrawing (or you are on a terminal with poor color support)
2929you may want to turn it off by defining the "ruby_no_expensive" variable: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002930
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002931 :let ruby_no_expensive = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002932<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002933In this case the same color will be used for all control keywords.
2934
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002935 *ruby_minlines*
2936
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002937If you do want this feature enabled, but notice highlighting errors while
2938scrolling backwards, which are fixed when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting
2939the "ruby_minlines" variable to a value larger than 50: >
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002940
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002941 :let ruby_minlines = 100
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002942<
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002943Ideally, this value should be a number of lines large enough to embrace your
2944largest class or module.
2945
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002946 *ruby_spellcheck_strings*
2947 Ruby: Spellchecking strings ~
Bram Moolenaar943d2b52005-12-02 00:50:49 +00002948
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002949Ruby syntax will perform spellchecking of strings if you define
2950"ruby_spellcheck_strings": >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002951
Bram Moolenaar7e1479b2016-09-11 15:07:27 +02002952 :let ruby_spellcheck_strings = 1
Bram Moolenaar25394022007-05-10 19:06:20 +00002953<
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00002954
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002955SCHEME *scheme.vim* *ft-scheme-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002956
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002957By default only R7RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002958
Bram Moolenaar72540672018-02-09 22:00:53 +01002959scheme.vim also supports extensions of the CHICKEN Scheme->C compiler.
2960Define b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00002961
2962
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002963SDL *sdl.vim* *ft-sdl-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002964
2965The SDL highlighting probably misses a few keywords, but SDL has so many
2966of them it's almost impossibly to cope.
2967
2968The new standard, SDL-2000, specifies that all identifiers are
2969case-sensitive (which was not so before), and that all keywords can be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002970used either completely lowercase or completely uppercase. To have the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002971highlighting reflect this, you can set the following variable: >
2972 :let sdl_2000=1
2973
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00002974This also sets many new keywords. If you want to disable the old
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002975keywords, which is probably a good idea, use: >
2976 :let SDL_no_96=1
2977
2978
2979The indentation is probably also incomplete, but right now I am very
2980satisfied with it for my own projects.
2981
2982
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00002983SED *sed.vim* *ft-sed-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002984
2985To make tabs stand out from regular blanks (accomplished by using Todo
2986highlighting on the tabs), define "highlight_sedtabs" by putting >
2987
2988 :let highlight_sedtabs = 1
2989
2990in the vimrc file. (This special highlighting only applies for tabs
2991inside search patterns, replacement texts, addresses or text included
2992by an Append/Change/Insert command.) If you enable this option, it is
2993also a good idea to set the tab width to one character; by doing that,
2994you can easily count the number of tabs in a string.
2995
2996Bugs:
2997
2998 The transform command (y) is treated exactly like the substitute
2999 command. This means that, as far as this syntax file is concerned,
3000 transform accepts the same flags as substitute, which is wrong.
3001 (Transform accepts no flags.) I tolerate this bug because the
3002 involved commands need very complex treatment (95 patterns, one for
3003 each plausible pattern delimiter).
3004
3005
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003006SGML *sgml.vim* *ft-sgml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003007
3008The coloring scheme for tags in the SGML file works as follows.
3009
3010The <> of opening tags are colored differently than the </> of a closing tag.
3011This is on purpose! For opening tags the 'Function' color is used, while for
3012closing tags the 'Type' color is used (See syntax.vim to check how those are
3013defined for you)
3014
3015Known tag names are colored the same way as statements in C. Unknown tag
3016names are not colored which makes it easy to spot errors.
3017
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003018Note that the same is true for argument (or attribute) names. Known attribute
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003019names are colored differently than unknown ones.
3020
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003021Some SGML tags are used to change the rendering of text. The following tags
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003022are recognized by the sgml.vim syntax coloring file and change the way normal
3023text is shown: <varname> <emphasis> <command> <function> <literal>
3024<replaceable> <ulink> and <link>.
3025
3026If you want to change how such text is rendered, you must redefine the
3027following syntax groups:
3028
3029 - sgmlBold
3030 - sgmlBoldItalic
3031 - sgmlUnderline
3032 - sgmlItalic
3033 - sgmlLink for links
3034
3035To make this redefinition work you must redefine them all and define the
3036following variable in your vimrc (this is due to the order in which the files
3037are read during initialization) >
3038 let sgml_my_rendering=1
3039
3040You can also disable this rendering by adding the following line to your
3041vimrc file: >
3042 let sgml_no_rendering=1
3043
3044(Adapted from the html.vim help text by Claudio Fleiner <claudio@fleiner.com>)
3045
3046
Bram Moolenaar4466ad62020-11-21 13:16:30 +01003047 *ft-posix-syntax* *ft-dash-syntax*
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003048SH *sh.vim* *ft-sh-syntax* *ft-bash-syntax* *ft-ksh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003049
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003050This covers syntax highlighting for the older Unix (Bourne) sh, and newer
3051shells such as bash, dash, posix, and the Korn shells.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003052
3053Vim attempts to determine which shell type is in use by specifying that
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003054various filenames are of specific types, e.g.: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003055
3056 ksh : .kshrc* *.ksh
3057 bash: .bashrc* bashrc bash.bashrc .bash_profile* *.bash
3058<
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02003059See $VIMRUNTIME/filetype.vim for the full list of patterns. If none of these
3060cases pertain, then the first line of the file is examined (ex. looking for
3061/bin/sh /bin/ksh /bin/bash). If the first line specifies a shelltype, then
3062that shelltype is used. However some files (ex. .profile) are known to be
3063shell files but the type is not apparent. Furthermore, on many systems sh is
3064symbolically linked to "bash" (Linux, Windows+cygwin) or "ksh" (Posix).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003065
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003066One may specify a global default by instantiating one of the following
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003067variables in your <.vimrc>:
3068
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003069 ksh: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003070 let g:is_kornshell = 1
Bram Moolenaarade0d392020-01-21 22:33:58 +01003071< posix: (using this is nearly the same as setting g:is_kornshell to 1) >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003072 let g:is_posix = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003073< bash: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003074 let g:is_bash = 1
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003075< sh: (default) Bourne shell >
Bram Moolenaar7fc904b2006-04-13 20:37:35 +00003076 let g:is_sh = 1
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003077
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003078< (dash users should use posix)
3079
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003080If there's no "#! ..." line, and the user hasn't availed himself/herself of a
3081default sh.vim syntax setting as just shown, then syntax/sh.vim will assume
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003082the Bourne shell syntax. No need to quote RFCs or market penetration
3083statistics in error reports, please -- just select the default version of the
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003084sh your system uses and install the associated "let..." in your <.vimrc>.
Bram Moolenaar910f66f2006-04-05 20:41:53 +00003085
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003086The syntax/sh.vim file provides several levels of syntax-based folding: >
3087
3088 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 0 (default, no syntax folding)
3089 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 1 (enable function folding)
3090 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 2 (enable heredoc folding)
3091 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 4 (enable if/do/for folding)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003092>
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003093then various syntax items (ie. HereDocuments and function bodies) become
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003094syntax-foldable (see |:syn-fold|). You also may add these together
3095to get multiple types of folding: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003096
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003097 let g:sh_fold_enabled= 3 (enables function and heredoc folding)
3098
3099If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards which are fixed
3100when one redraws with CTRL-L, try setting the "sh_minlines" internal variable
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003101to a larger number. Example: >
3102
3103 let sh_minlines = 500
3104
3105This will make syntax synchronization start 500 lines before the first
3106displayed line. The default value is 200. The disadvantage of using a larger
3107number is that redrawing can become slow.
3108
3109If you don't have much to synchronize on, displaying can be very slow. To
3110reduce this, the "sh_maxlines" internal variable can be set. Example: >
3111
3112 let sh_maxlines = 100
3113<
3114The default is to use the twice sh_minlines. Set it to a smaller number to
3115speed up displaying. The disadvantage is that highlight errors may appear.
3116
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003117syntax/sh.vim tries to flag certain problems as errors; usually things like
3118extra ']'s, 'done's, 'fi's, etc. If you find the error handling problematic
3119for your purposes, you may suppress such error highlighting by putting
3120the following line in your .vimrc: >
3121
3122 let g:sh_no_error= 1
3123<
Bram Moolenaardc083282016-10-11 08:57:33 +02003124
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003125 *sh-embed* *sh-awk*
3126 Sh: EMBEDDING LANGUAGES~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003127
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003128You may wish to embed languages into sh. I'll give an example courtesy of
3129Lorance Stinson on how to do this with awk as an example. Put the following
3130file into $HOME/.vim/after/syntax/sh/awkembed.vim: >
3131
Bram Moolenaardae8d212016-02-27 22:40:16 +01003132 " AWK Embedding:
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003133 " ==============
3134 " Shamelessly ripped from aspperl.vim by Aaron Hope.
3135 if exists("b:current_syntax")
3136 unlet b:current_syntax
3137 endif
3138 syn include @AWKScript syntax/awk.vim
3139 syn region AWKScriptCode matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+[=\\]\@<!'+ skip=+\\'+ end=+'+ contains=@AWKScript contained
3140 syn region AWKScriptEmbedded matchgroup=AWKCommand start=+\<awk\>+ skip=+\\$+ end=+[=\\]\@<!'+me=e-1 contains=@shIdList,@shExprList2 nextgroup=AWKScriptCode
3141 syn cluster shCommandSubList add=AWKScriptEmbedded
3142 hi def link AWKCommand Type
3143<
3144This code will then let the awk code in the single quotes: >
3145 awk '...awk code here...'
3146be highlighted using the awk highlighting syntax. Clearly this may be
3147extended to other languages.
3148
3149
3150SPEEDUP *spup.vim* *ft-spup-syntax*
3151(AspenTech plant simulator)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003152
3153The Speedup syntax file has some options:
3154
3155- strict_subsections : If this variable is defined, only keywords for
3156 sections and subsections will be highlighted as statements but not
3157 other keywords (like WITHIN in the OPERATION section).
3158
3159- highlight_types : Definition of this variable causes stream types
3160 like temperature or pressure to be highlighted as Type, not as a
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003161 plain Identifier. Included are the types that are usually found in
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003162 the DECLARE section; if you defined own types, you have to include
3163 them in the syntax file.
3164
3165- oneline_comments : this value ranges from 1 to 3 and determines the
3166 highlighting of # style comments.
3167
3168 oneline_comments = 1 : allow normal Speedup code after an even
3169 number of #s.
3170
3171 oneline_comments = 2 : show code starting with the second # as
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003172 error. This is the default setting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003173
3174 oneline_comments = 3 : show the whole line as error if it contains
3175 more than one #.
3176
3177Since especially OPERATION sections tend to become very large due to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003178PRESETting variables, syncing may be critical. If your computer is
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003179fast enough, you can increase minlines and/or maxlines near the end of
3180the syntax file.
3181
3182
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003183SQL *sql.vim* *ft-sql-syntax*
3184 *sqlinformix.vim* *ft-sqlinformix-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003185 *sqlanywhere.vim* *ft-sqlanywhere-syntax*
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003186
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003187While there is an ANSI standard for SQL, most database engines add their own
3188custom extensions. Vim currently supports the Oracle and Informix dialects of
3189SQL. Vim assumes "*.sql" files are Oracle SQL by default.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003190
Bram Moolenaar1056d982006-03-09 22:37:52 +00003191Vim currently has SQL support for a variety of different vendors via syntax
3192scripts. You can change Vim's default from Oracle to any of the current SQL
3193supported types. You can also easily alter the SQL dialect being used on a
3194buffer by buffer basis.
3195
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003196For more detailed instructions see |ft_sql.txt|.
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003197
3198
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003199TCSH *tcsh.vim* *ft-tcsh-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003200
3201This covers the shell named "tcsh". It is a superset of csh. See |csh.vim|
3202for how the filetype is detected.
3203
3204Tcsh does not allow \" in strings unless the "backslash_quote" shell variable
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003205is set. If you want VIM to assume that no backslash quote constructs exist add
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003206this line to your .vimrc: >
3207
3208 :let tcsh_backslash_quote = 0
3209
3210If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
3211when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "tcsh_minlines" internal variable
3212to a larger number: >
3213
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003214 :let tcsh_minlines = 1000
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003215
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01003216This will make the syntax synchronization start 1000 lines before the first
3217displayed line. If you set "tcsh_minlines" to "fromstart", then
3218synchronization is done from the start of the file. The default value for
3219tcsh_minlines is 100. The disadvantage of using a larger number is that
3220redrawing can become slow.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003221
3222
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003223TEX *tex.vim* *ft-tex-syntax* *latex-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003224 *syntax-tex* *syntax-latex*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003225
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003226 Tex Contents~
3227 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? |tex-folding|
3228 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted |g:tex_nospell|
3229 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? |tex-nospell|
3230 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones? |tex-verb|
3231 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones |tex-runon|
3232 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? |tex-slow|
3233 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? |tex-morecommands|
3234 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? |tex-error|
3235 Tex: Need a new Math Group? |tex-math|
3236 Tex: Starting a New Style? |tex-style|
3237 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode |tex-conceal|
3238 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode |g:tex_conceal|
3239 Tex: Controlling iskeyword |g:tex_isk|
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003240 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control |tex-supersub|
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003241 Tex: Match Check Control |tex-matchcheck|
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003242
3243 *tex-folding* *g:tex_fold_enabled*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003244 Tex: Want Syntax Folding? ~
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003245
3246As of version 28 of <syntax/tex.vim>, syntax-based folding of parts, chapters,
3247sections, subsections, etc are supported. Put >
3248 let g:tex_fold_enabled=1
3249in your <.vimrc>, and :set fdm=syntax. I suggest doing the latter via a
3250modeline at the end of your LaTeX file: >
3251 % vim: fdm=syntax
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003252If your system becomes too slow, then you might wish to look into >
Bram Moolenaar6c1e1572019-06-22 02:13:00 +02003253 https://vimhelp.org/vim_faq.txt.html#faq-29.7
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003254<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003255 *g:tex_nospell*
3256 Tex: No Spell Checking Wanted~
3257
3258If you don't want spell checking anywhere in your LaTeX document, put >
3259 let g:tex_nospell=1
3260into your .vimrc. If you merely wish to suppress spell checking inside
3261comments only, see |g:tex_comment_nospell|.
3262
3263 *tex-nospell* *g:tex_comment_nospell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003264 Tex: Don't Want Spell Checking In Comments? ~
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003265
3266Some folks like to include things like source code in comments and so would
3267prefer that spell checking be disabled in comments in LaTeX files. To do
3268this, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3269 let g:tex_comment_nospell= 1
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003270If you want to suppress spell checking everywhere inside your LaTeX document,
3271see |g:tex_nospell|.
3272
3273 *tex-verb* *g:tex_verbspell*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003274 Tex: Want Spell Checking in Verbatim Zones?~
Bram Moolenaar74cbdf02010-08-04 23:03:17 +02003275
3276Often verbatim regions are used for things like source code; seldom does
3277one want source code spell-checked. However, for those of you who do
3278want your verbatim zones spell-checked, put the following in your <.vimrc>: >
3279 let g:tex_verbspell= 1
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003280<
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003281 *tex-runon* *tex-stopzone*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003282 Tex: Run-on Comments or MathZones ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003283
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003284The <syntax/tex.vim> highlighting supports TeX, LaTeX, and some AmsTeX. The
3285highlighting supports three primary zones/regions: normal, texZone, and
3286texMathZone. Although considerable effort has been made to have these zones
3287terminate properly, zones delineated by $..$ and $$..$$ cannot be synchronized
3288as there's no difference between start and end patterns. Consequently, a
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003289special "TeX comment" has been provided >
3290 %stopzone
3291which will forcibly terminate the highlighting of either a texZone or a
3292texMathZone.
3293
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003294 *tex-slow* *tex-sync*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003295 Tex: Slow Syntax Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003296
3297If you have a slow computer, you may wish to reduce the values for >
3298 :syn sync maxlines=200
3299 :syn sync minlines=50
3300(especially the latter). If your computer is fast, you may wish to
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003301increase them. This primarily affects synchronizing (i.e. just what group,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003302if any, is the text at the top of the screen supposed to be in?).
3303
Bram Moolenaard960d762011-09-21 19:22:10 +02003304Another cause of slow highlighting is due to syntax-driven folding; see
3305|tex-folding| for a way around this.
3306
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003307 *g:tex_fast*
3308
3309Finally, if syntax highlighting is still too slow, you may set >
3310
3311 :let g:tex_fast= ""
3312
3313in your .vimrc. Used this way, the g:tex_fast variable causes the syntax
3314highlighting script to avoid defining any regions and associated
3315synchronization. The result will be much faster syntax highlighting; the
3316price: you will no longer have as much highlighting or any syntax-based
3317folding, and you will be missing syntax-based error checking.
3318
3319You may decide that some syntax is acceptable; you may use the following table
3320selectively to enable just some syntax highlighting: >
3321
3322 b : allow bold and italic syntax
3323 c : allow texComment syntax
3324 m : allow texMatcher syntax (ie. {...} and [...])
3325 M : allow texMath syntax
3326 p : allow parts, chapter, section, etc syntax
3327 r : allow texRefZone syntax (nocite, bibliography, label, pageref, eqref)
3328 s : allow superscript/subscript regions
3329 S : allow texStyle syntax
3330 v : allow verbatim syntax
3331 V : allow texNewEnv and texNewCmd syntax
3332<
3333As an example, let g:tex_fast= "M" will allow math-associated highlighting
3334but suppress all the other region-based syntax highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003335(also see: |g:tex_conceal| and |tex-supersub|)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003336
3337 *tex-morecommands* *tex-package*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003338 Tex: Want To Highlight More Commands? ~
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003339
3340LaTeX is a programmable language, and so there are thousands of packages full
3341of specialized LaTeX commands, syntax, and fonts. If you're using such a
3342package you'll often wish that the distributed syntax/tex.vim would support
3343it. However, clearly this is impractical. So please consider using the
3344techniques in |mysyntaxfile-add| to extend or modify the highlighting provided
Bram Moolenaarb6b046b2011-12-30 13:11:27 +01003345by syntax/tex.vim. Please consider uploading any extensions that you write,
3346which typically would go in $HOME/after/syntax/tex/[pkgname].vim, to
3347http://vim.sf.net/.
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00003348
Bram Moolenaar93a1df22018-09-10 11:51:50 +02003349I've included some support for various popular packages on my website: >
3350
3351 http://www.drchip.org/astronaut/vim/index.html#LATEXPKGS
3352<
3353The syntax files there go into your .../after/syntax/tex/ directory.
3354
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003355 *tex-error* *g:tex_no_error*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003356 Tex: Excessive Error Highlighting? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003357
3358The <tex.vim> supports lexical error checking of various sorts. Thus,
3359although the error checking is ofttimes very useful, it can indicate
3360errors where none actually are. If this proves to be a problem for you,
3361you may put in your <.vimrc> the following statement: >
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003362 let g:tex_no_error=1
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003363and all error checking by <syntax/tex.vim> will be suppressed.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003364
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003365 *tex-math*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003366 Tex: Need a new Math Group? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003367
3368If you want to include a new math group in your LaTeX, the following
3369code shows you an example as to how you might do so: >
Bram Moolenaar488c6512005-08-11 20:09:58 +00003370 call TexNewMathZone(sfx,mathzone,starform)
3371You'll want to provide the new math group with a unique suffix
3372(currently, A-L and V-Z are taken by <syntax/tex.vim> itself).
3373As an example, consider how eqnarray is set up by <syntax/tex.vim>: >
3374 call TexNewMathZone("D","eqnarray",1)
3375You'll need to change "mathzone" to the name of your new math group,
3376and then to the call to it in .vim/after/syntax/tex.vim.
3377The "starform" variable, if true, implies that your new math group
3378has a starred form (ie. eqnarray*).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003379
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003380 *tex-style* *b:tex_stylish*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003381 Tex: Starting a New Style? ~
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003382
3383One may use "\makeatletter" in *.tex files, thereby making the use of "@" in
3384commands available. However, since the *.tex file doesn't have one of the
3385following suffices: sty cls clo dtx ltx, the syntax highlighting will flag
3386such use of @ as an error. To solve this: >
3387
3388 :let b:tex_stylish = 1
3389 :set ft=tex
3390
3391Putting "let g:tex_stylish=1" into your <.vimrc> will make <syntax/tex.vim>
3392always accept such use of @.
3393
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003394 *tex-cchar* *tex-cole* *tex-conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003395 Tex: Taking Advantage of Conceal Mode~
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003396
Bram Moolenaar477db062010-07-28 18:17:41 +02003397If you have |'conceallevel'| set to 2 and if your encoding is utf-8, then a
3398number of character sequences can be translated into appropriate utf-8 glyphs,
3399including various accented characters, Greek characters in MathZones, and
3400superscripts and subscripts in MathZones. Not all characters can be made into
3401superscripts or subscripts; the constraint is due to what utf-8 supports.
3402In fact, only a few characters are supported as subscripts.
3403
3404One way to use this is to have vertically split windows (see |CTRL-W_v|); one
3405with |'conceallevel'| at 0 and the other at 2; and both using |'scrollbind'|.
Bram Moolenaar611df5b2010-07-26 22:51:56 +02003406
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003407 *g:tex_conceal*
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003408 Tex: Selective Conceal Mode~
3409
3410You may selectively use conceal mode by setting g:tex_conceal in your
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003411<.vimrc>. By default, g:tex_conceal is set to "admgs" to enable concealment
3412for the following sets of characters: >
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003413
3414 a = accents/ligatures
Bram Moolenaard38b0552012-04-25 19:07:41 +02003415 b = bold and italic
Bram Moolenaar7fc0c062010-08-10 21:43:35 +02003416 d = delimiters
3417 m = math symbols
3418 g = Greek
3419 s = superscripts/subscripts
3420<
3421By leaving one or more of these out, the associated conceal-character
3422substitution will not be made.
3423
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003424 *g:tex_isk* *g:tex_stylish*
3425 Tex: Controlling iskeyword~
3426
3427Normally, LaTeX keywords support 0-9, a-z, A-z, and 192-255 only. Latex
3428keywords don't support the underscore - except when in *.sty files. The
3429syntax highlighting script handles this with the following logic:
3430
3431 * If g:tex_stylish exists and is 1
3432 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3433 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003434 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003435 * Else if the file's suffix is sty, cls, clo, dtx, or ltx,
3436 then the file will be treated as a "sty" file, so the "_"
3437 will be allowed as part of keywords
Bram Moolenaar3df01732017-02-17 22:47:16 +01003438 (regardless of g:tex_isk)
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003439
3440 * If g:tex_isk exists, then it will be used for the local 'iskeyword'
3441 * Else the local 'iskeyword' will be set to 48-57,a-z,A-Z,192-255
3442
Bram Moolenaar6e932462014-09-09 18:48:09 +02003443 *tex-supersub* *g:tex_superscripts* *g:tex_subscripts*
3444 Tex: Fine Subscript and Superscript Control~
3445
3446 See |tex-conceal| for how to enable concealed character replacement.
3447
3448 See |g:tex_conceal| for selectively concealing accents, bold/italic,
3449 math, Greek, and superscripts/subscripts.
3450
3451 One may exert fine control over which superscripts and subscripts one
3452 wants syntax-based concealment for (see |:syn-cchar|). Since not all
3453 fonts support all characters, one may override the
3454 concealed-replacement lists; by default these lists are given by: >
3455
3456 let g:tex_superscripts= "[0-9a-zA-W.,:;+-<>/()=]"
3457 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aehijklmnoprstuvx,+-/().]"
3458<
3459 For example, I use Luxi Mono Bold; it doesn't support subscript
3460 characters for "hklmnpst", so I put >
3461 let g:tex_subscripts= "[0-9aeijoruvx,+-/().]"
3462< in ~/.vim/ftplugin/tex/tex.vim in order to avoid having inscrutable
3463 utf-8 glyphs appear.
3464
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003465 *tex-matchcheck* *g:tex_matchcheck*
3466 Tex: Match Check Control~
3467
3468 Sometimes one actually wants mismatched parentheses, square braces,
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02003469 and or curly braces; for example, \text{(1,10]} is a range from but
3470 not including 1 to and including 10. This wish, of course, conflicts
Bram Moolenaar1b884a02020-12-10 21:11:27 +01003471 with the desire to provide delimiter mismatch detection. To
3472 accommodate these conflicting goals, syntax/tex.vim provides >
3473 g:tex_matchcheck = '[({[]'
3474< which is shown along with its default setting. So, if one doesn't
3475 want [] and () to be checked for mismatches, try using >
3476 let g:tex_matchcheck= '[{}]'
3477< If you don't want matching to occur inside bold and italicized
3478 regions, >
3479 let g:tex_excludematcher= 1
3480< will prevent the texMatcher group from being included in those regions.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02003481
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003482TF *tf.vim* *ft-tf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003483
Bram Moolenaar22dbc772013-06-28 18:44:48 +02003484There is one option for the tf syntax highlighting.
3485
3486For syncing, minlines defaults to 100. If you prefer another value, you can
3487set "tf_minlines" to the value you desire. Example: >
3488
3489 :let tf_minlines = your choice
3490<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003491VIM *vim.vim* *ft-vim-syntax*
3492 *g:vimsyn_minlines* *g:vimsyn_maxlines*
Bram Moolenaar996343d2010-07-04 22:20:21 +02003493There is a trade-off between more accurate syntax highlighting versus screen
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003494updating speed. To improve accuracy, you may wish to increase the
3495g:vimsyn_minlines variable. The g:vimsyn_maxlines variable may be used to
3496improve screen updating rates (see |:syn-sync| for more on this). >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003497
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003498 g:vimsyn_minlines : used to set synchronization minlines
3499 g:vimsyn_maxlines : used to set synchronization maxlines
3500<
3501 (g:vim_minlines and g:vim_maxlines are deprecated variants of
3502 these two options)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003503
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003504 *g:vimsyn_embed*
3505The g:vimsyn_embed option allows users to select what, if any, types of
3506embedded script highlighting they wish to have. >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003507
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003508 g:vimsyn_embed == 0 : don't support any embedded scripts
3509 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'l' : support embedded lua
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003510 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'm' : support embedded mzscheme
3511 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'p' : support embedded perl
3512 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'P' : support embedded python
3513 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 'r' : support embedded ruby
3514 g:vimsyn_embed =~ 't' : support embedded tcl
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003515<
Bram Moolenaar7cba6c02013-09-05 22:13:31 +02003516By default, g:vimsyn_embed is a string supporting interpreters that your vim
3517itself supports. Concatenate multiple characters to support multiple types
3518of embedded interpreters; ie. g:vimsyn_embed= "mp" supports embedded mzscheme
3519and embedded perl.
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003520 *g:vimsyn_folding*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003521
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003522Some folding is now supported with syntax/vim.vim: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003523
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003524 g:vimsyn_folding == 0 or doesn't exist: no syntax-based folding
3525 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'a' : augroups
3526 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'f' : fold functions
Bram Moolenaara0f849e2015-10-30 14:37:44 +01003527 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'l' : fold lua script
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003528 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'm' : fold mzscheme script
3529 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'p' : fold perl script
3530 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'P' : fold python script
3531 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 'r' : fold ruby script
3532 g:vimsyn_folding =~ 't' : fold tcl script
Bram Moolenaar30b65812012-07-12 22:01:11 +02003533<
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003534 *g:vimsyn_noerror*
Bram Moolenaarb544f3c2017-02-23 19:03:28 +01003535Not all error highlighting that syntax/vim.vim does may be correct; Vim script
3536is a difficult language to highlight correctly. A way to suppress error
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003537highlighting is to put the following line in your |vimrc|: >
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003538
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00003539 let g:vimsyn_noerror = 1
3540<
Bram Moolenaar437df8f2006-04-27 21:47:44 +00003541
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003542
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003543XF86CONFIG *xf86conf.vim* *ft-xf86conf-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003544
3545The syntax of XF86Config file differs in XFree86 v3.x and v4.x. Both
3546variants are supported. Automatic detection is used, but is far from perfect.
3547You may need to specify the version manually. Set the variable
3548xf86conf_xfree86_version to 3 or 4 according to your XFree86 version in
3549your .vimrc. Example: >
3550 :let xf86conf_xfree86_version=3
3551When using a mix of versions, set the b:xf86conf_xfree86_version variable.
3552
3553Note that spaces and underscores in option names are not supported. Use
3554"SyncOnGreen" instead of "__s yn con gr_e_e_n" if you want the option name
3555highlighted.
3556
3557
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003558XML *xml.vim* *ft-xml-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003559
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003560Xml namespaces are highlighted by default. This can be inhibited by
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003561setting a global variable: >
3562
3563 :let g:xml_namespace_transparent=1
3564<
3565 *xml-folding*
3566The xml syntax file provides syntax |folding| (see |:syn-fold|) between
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003567start and end tags. This can be turned on by >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003568
3569 :let g:xml_syntax_folding = 1
3570 :set foldmethod=syntax
3571
3572Note: syntax folding might slow down syntax highlighting significantly,
3573especially for large files.
3574
3575
Bram Moolenaarda2303d2005-08-30 21:55:26 +00003576X Pixmaps (XPM) *xpm.vim* *ft-xpm-syntax*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003577
3578xpm.vim creates its syntax items dynamically based upon the contents of the
3579XPM file. Thus if you make changes e.g. in the color specification strings,
3580you have to source it again e.g. with ":set syn=xpm".
3581
3582To copy a pixel with one of the colors, yank a "pixel" with "yl" and insert it
3583somewhere else with "P".
3584
3585Do you want to draw with the mouse? Try the following: >
3586 :function! GetPixel()
Bram Moolenaar61660ea2006-04-07 21:40:07 +00003587 : let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003588 : echo c
3589 : exe "noremap <LeftMouse> <LeftMouse>r".c
3590 : exe "noremap <LeftDrag> <LeftMouse>r".c
3591 :endfunction
3592 :noremap <RightMouse> <LeftMouse>:call GetPixel()<CR>
3593 :set guicursor=n:hor20 " to see the color beneath the cursor
3594This turns the right button into a pipette and the left button into a pen.
3595It will work with XPM files that have one character per pixel only and you
3596must not click outside of the pixel strings, but feel free to improve it.
3597
3598It will look much better with a font in a quadratic cell size, e.g. for X: >
3599 :set guifont=-*-clean-medium-r-*-*-8-*-*-*-*-80-*
3600
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003601
3602YAML *yaml.vim* *ft-yaml-syntax*
3603
3604 *g:yaml_schema* *b:yaml_schema*
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003605A YAML schema is a combination of a set of tags and a mechanism for resolving
3606non-specific tags. For user this means that YAML parser may, depending on
3607plain scalar contents, treat plain scalar (which can actually be only string
3608and nothing else) as a value of the other type: null, boolean, floating-point,
3609integer. `g:yaml_schema` option determines according to which schema values
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003610will be highlighted specially. Supported schemas are
3611
3612Schema Description ~
3613failsafe No additional highlighting.
3614json Supports JSON-style numbers, booleans and null.
3615core Supports more number, boolean and null styles.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003616pyyaml In addition to core schema supports highlighting timestamps,
3617 but there are some differences in what is recognized as
3618 numbers and many additional boolean values not present in core
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003619 schema.
3620
3621Default schema is `core`.
3622
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003623Note that schemas are not actually limited to plain scalars, but this is the
3624only difference between schemas defined in YAML specification and the only
Bram Moolenaar5a5f4592015-04-13 12:43:06 +02003625difference defined in the syntax file.
3626
Bram Moolenaarf3913272016-02-25 00:00:01 +01003627
3628ZSH *zsh.vim* *ft-zsh-syntax*
3629
3630The syntax script for zsh allows for syntax-based folding: >
3631
3632 :let g:zsh_fold_enable = 1
3633
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003634==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010036356. Defining a syntax *:syn-define* *E410*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003636
3637Vim understands three types of syntax items:
3638
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036391. Keyword
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003640 It can only contain keyword characters, according to the 'iskeyword'
3641 option. It cannot contain other syntax items. It will only match with a
3642 complete word (there are no keyword characters before or after the match).
3643 The keyword "if" would match in "if(a=b)", but not in "ifdef x", because
3644 "(" is not a keyword character and "d" is.
3645
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036462. Match
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003647 This is a match with a single regexp pattern.
3648
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +000036493. Region
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003650 This starts at a match of the "start" regexp pattern and ends with a match
3651 with the "end" regexp pattern. Any other text can appear in between. A
3652 "skip" regexp pattern can be used to avoid matching the "end" pattern.
3653
3654Several syntax ITEMs can be put into one syntax GROUP. For a syntax group
3655you can give highlighting attributes. For example, you could have an item
3656to define a "/* .. */" comment and another one that defines a "// .." comment,
3657and put them both in the "Comment" group. You can then specify that a
3658"Comment" will be in bold font and have a blue color. You are free to make
3659one highlight group for one syntax item, or put all items into one group.
3660This depends on how you want to specify your highlighting attributes. Putting
3661each item in its own group results in having to specify the highlighting
3662for a lot of groups.
3663
3664Note that a syntax group and a highlight group are similar. For a highlight
3665group you will have given highlight attributes. These attributes will be used
3666for the syntax group with the same name.
3667
3668In case more than one item matches at the same position, the one that was
3669defined LAST wins. Thus you can override previously defined syntax items by
3670using an item that matches the same text. But a keyword always goes before a
3671match or region. And a keyword with matching case always goes before a
3672keyword with ignoring case.
3673
3674
3675PRIORITY *:syn-priority*
3676
3677When several syntax items may match, these rules are used:
3678
36791. When multiple Match or Region items start in the same position, the item
3680 defined last has priority.
36812. A Keyword has priority over Match and Region items.
36823. An item that starts in an earlier position has priority over items that
3683 start in later positions.
3684
3685
3686DEFINING CASE *:syn-case* *E390*
3687
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003688:sy[ntax] case [match | ignore]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003689 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will work with
3690 matching case, when using "match", or with ignoring case, when using
3691 "ignore". Note that any items before this are not affected, and all
3692 items until the next ":syntax case" command are affected.
3693
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003694:sy[ntax] case
3695 Show either "syntax case match" or "syntax case ignore" (translated).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003696
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003697
3698DEFINING FOLDLEVEL *:syn-foldlevel*
3699
3700:sy[ntax] foldlevel [start | minimum]
3701 This defines how the foldlevel of a line is computed when using
3702 foldmethod=syntax (see |fold-syntax| and |:syn-fold|):
3703
3704 start: Use level of item containing start of line.
3705 minimum: Use lowest local-minimum level of items on line.
3706
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003707 The default is "start". Use "minimum" to search a line horizontally
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02003708 for the lowest level contained on the line that is followed by a
3709 higher level. This produces more natural folds when syntax items
3710 may close and open horizontally within a line.
3711
3712:sy[ntax] foldlevel
3713 Show either "syntax foldlevel start" or "syntax foldlevel minimum".
3714
3715 {not meaningful when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
3716
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003717SPELL CHECKING *:syn-spell*
3718
3719:sy[ntax] spell [toplevel | notoplevel | default]
3720 This defines where spell checking is to be done for text that is not
3721 in a syntax item:
3722
3723 toplevel: Text is spell checked.
3724 notoplevel: Text is not spell checked.
3725 default: When there is a @Spell cluster no spell checking.
3726
3727 For text in syntax items use the @Spell and @NoSpell clusters
3728 |spell-syntax|. When there is no @Spell and no @NoSpell cluster then
3729 spell checking is done for "default" and "toplevel".
3730
3731 To activate spell checking the 'spell' option must be set.
3732
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01003733:sy[ntax] spell
3734 Show either "syntax spell toplevel", "syntax spell notoplevel" or
3735 "syntax spell default" (translated).
3736
3737
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003738SYNTAX ISKEYWORD SETTING *:syn-iskeyword*
3739
3740:sy[ntax] iskeyword [clear | {option}]
3741 This defines the keyword characters. It's like the 'iskeyword' option
3742 for but only applies to syntax highlighting.
3743
3744 clear: Syntax specific iskeyword setting is disabled and the
3745 buffer-local 'iskeyword' setting is used.
Bram Moolenaar664f3cf2019-12-07 16:03:51 +01003746 {option} Set the syntax 'iskeyword' option to a new value.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003747
3748 Example: >
3749 :syntax iskeyword @,48-57,192-255,$,_
3750<
3751 This would set the syntax specific iskeyword option to include all
3752 alphabetic characters, plus the numeric characters, all accented
3753 characters and also includes the "_" and the "$".
3754
3755 If no argument is given, the current value will be output.
3756
3757 Setting this option influences what |/\k| matches in syntax patterns
Bram Moolenaar298b4402016-01-28 22:38:53 +01003758 and also determines where |:syn-keyword| will be checked for a new
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003759 match.
3760
Bram Moolenaard0796902016-09-16 20:02:31 +02003761 It is recommended when writing syntax files, to use this command to
3762 set the correct value for the specific syntax language and not change
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003763 the 'iskeyword' option.
Bram Moolenaarce0842a2005-07-18 21:58:11 +00003764
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003765DEFINING KEYWORDS *:syn-keyword*
3766
3767:sy[ntax] keyword {group-name} [{options}] {keyword} .. [{options}]
3768
3769 This defines a number of keywords.
3770
3771 {group-name} Is a syntax group name such as "Comment".
3772 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3773 {keyword} .. Is a list of keywords which are part of this group.
3774
3775 Example: >
3776 :syntax keyword Type int long char
3777<
3778 The {options} can be given anywhere in the line. They will apply to
3779 all keywords given, also for options that come after a keyword.
3780 These examples do exactly the same: >
3781 :syntax keyword Type contained int long char
3782 :syntax keyword Type int long contained char
3783 :syntax keyword Type int long char contained
Bram Moolenaar88774fd2015-08-25 19:52:04 +02003784< *E789* *E890*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003785 When you have a keyword with an optional tail, like Ex commands in
3786 Vim, you can put the optional characters inside [], to define all the
3787 variations at once: >
3788 :syntax keyword vimCommand ab[breviate] n[ext]
3789<
3790 Don't forget that a keyword can only be recognized if all the
3791 characters are included in the 'iskeyword' option. If one character
3792 isn't, the keyword will never be recognized.
3793 Multi-byte characters can also be used. These do not have to be in
3794 'iskeyword'.
Bram Moolenaarb8060fe2016-01-19 22:29:28 +01003795 See |:syn-iskeyword| for defining syntax specific iskeyword settings.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003796
3797 A keyword always has higher priority than a match or region, the
3798 keyword is used if more than one item matches. Keywords do not nest
3799 and a keyword can't contain anything else.
3800
3801 Note that when you have a keyword that is the same as an option (even
3802 one that isn't allowed here), you can not use it. Use a match
3803 instead.
3804
3805 The maximum length of a keyword is 80 characters.
3806
3807 The same keyword can be defined multiple times, when its containment
3808 differs. For example, you can define the keyword once not contained
3809 and use one highlight group, and once contained, and use a different
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003810 highlight group. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003811 :syn keyword vimCommand tag
3812 :syn keyword vimSetting contained tag
3813< When finding "tag" outside of any syntax item, the "vimCommand"
3814 highlight group is used. When finding "tag" in a syntax item that
3815 contains "vimSetting", the "vimSetting" group is used.
3816
3817
3818DEFINING MATCHES *:syn-match*
3819
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003820:sy[ntax] match {group-name} [{options}]
3821 [excludenl]
3822 [keepend]
3823 {pattern}
3824 [{options}]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003825
3826 This defines one match.
3827
3828 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3829 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3830 [excludenl] Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3831 extend a containing match or region. Must be
3832 given before the pattern. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaar2ec618c2016-10-01 14:47:05 +02003833 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3834 match with the end pattern. See
3835 |:syn-keepend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003836 {pattern} The search pattern that defines the match.
3837 See |:syn-pattern| below.
3838 Note that the pattern may match more than one
3839 line, which makes the match depend on where
3840 Vim starts searching for the pattern. You
3841 need to make sure syncing takes care of this.
3842
3843 Example (match a character constant): >
3844 :syntax match Character /'.'/hs=s+1,he=e-1
3845<
3846
3847DEFINING REGIONS *:syn-region* *:syn-start* *:syn-skip* *:syn-end*
3848 *E398* *E399*
3849:sy[ntax] region {group-name} [{options}]
3850 [matchgroup={group-name}]
3851 [keepend]
3852 [extend]
3853 [excludenl]
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003854 start={start-pattern} ..
3855 [skip={skip-pattern}]
3856 end={end-pattern} ..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003857 [{options}]
3858
3859 This defines one region. It may span several lines.
3860
3861 {group-name} A syntax group name such as "Comment".
3862 [{options}] See |:syn-arguments| below.
3863 [matchgroup={group-name}] The syntax group to use for the following
3864 start or end pattern matches only. Not used
3865 for the text in between the matched start and
3866 end patterns. Use NONE to reset to not using
3867 a different group for the start or end match.
3868 See |:syn-matchgroup|.
3869 keepend Don't allow contained matches to go past a
3870 match with the end pattern. See
3871 |:syn-keepend|.
3872 extend Override a "keepend" for an item this region
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00003873 is contained in. See |:syn-extend|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003874 excludenl Don't make a pattern with the end-of-line "$"
3875 extend a containing match or item. Only
3876 useful for end patterns. Must be given before
3877 the patterns it applies to. |:syn-excludenl|
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003878 start={start-pattern} The search pattern that defines the start of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003879 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003880 skip={skip-pattern} The search pattern that defines text inside
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003881 the region where not to look for the end
3882 pattern. See |:syn-pattern| below.
Bram Moolenaare7b1ea02020-08-07 19:54:59 +02003883 end={end-pattern} The search pattern that defines the end of
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003884 the region. See |:syn-pattern| below.
3885
3886 Example: >
3887 :syntax region String start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3888<
3889 The start/skip/end patterns and the options can be given in any order.
3890 There can be zero or one skip pattern. There must be one or more
3891 start and end patterns. This means that you can omit the skip
3892 pattern, but you must give at least one start and one end pattern. It
3893 is allowed to have white space before and after the equal sign
3894 (although it mostly looks better without white space).
3895
3896 When more than one start pattern is given, a match with one of these
3897 is sufficient. This means there is an OR relation between the start
3898 patterns. The last one that matches is used. The same is true for
3899 the end patterns.
3900
3901 The search for the end pattern starts right after the start pattern.
3902 Offsets are not used for this. This implies that the match for the
3903 end pattern will never overlap with the start pattern.
3904
3905 The skip and end pattern can match across line breaks, but since the
3906 search for the pattern can start in any line it often does not do what
3907 you want. The skip pattern doesn't avoid a match of an end pattern in
3908 the next line. Use single-line patterns to avoid trouble.
3909
3910 Note: The decision to start a region is only based on a matching start
3911 pattern. There is no check for a matching end pattern. This does NOT
3912 work: >
3913 :syn region First start="(" end=":"
3914 :syn region Second start="(" end=";"
3915< The Second always matches before the First (last defined pattern has
3916 higher priority). The Second region then continues until the next
3917 ';', no matter if there is a ':' before it. Using a match does work: >
3918 :syn match First "(\_.\{-}:"
3919 :syn match Second "(\_.\{-};"
3920< This pattern matches any character or line break with "\_." and
3921 repeats that with "\{-}" (repeat as few as possible).
3922
3923 *:syn-keepend*
3924 By default, a contained match can obscure a match for the end pattern.
3925 This is useful for nesting. For example, a region that starts with
3926 "{" and ends with "}", can contain another region. An encountered "}"
3927 will then end the contained region, but not the outer region:
3928 { starts outer "{}" region
3929 { starts contained "{}" region
3930 } ends contained "{}" region
3931 } ends outer "{} region
3932 If you don't want this, the "keepend" argument will make the matching
3933 of an end pattern of the outer region also end any contained item.
3934 This makes it impossible to nest the same region, but allows for
3935 contained items to highlight parts of the end pattern, without causing
3936 that to skip the match with the end pattern. Example: >
3937 :syn match vimComment +"[^"]\+$+
3938 :syn region vimCommand start="set" end="$" contains=vimComment keepend
3939< The "keepend" makes the vimCommand always end at the end of the line,
3940 even though the contained vimComment includes a match with the <EOL>.
3941
3942 When "keepend" is not used, a match with an end pattern is retried
3943 after each contained match. When "keepend" is included, the first
3944 encountered match with an end pattern is used, truncating any
3945 contained matches.
3946 *:syn-extend*
3947 The "keepend" behavior can be changed by using the "extend" argument.
3948 When an item with "extend" is contained in an item that uses
3949 "keepend", the "keepend" is ignored and the containing region will be
3950 extended.
3951 This can be used to have some contained items extend a region while
3952 others don't. Example: >
3953
3954 :syn region htmlRef start=+<a>+ end=+</a>+ keepend contains=htmlItem,htmlScript
3955 :syn match htmlItem +<[^>]*>+ contained
3956 :syn region htmlScript start=+<script+ end=+</script[^>]*>+ contained extend
3957
3958< Here the htmlItem item does not make the htmlRef item continue
3959 further, it is only used to highlight the <> items. The htmlScript
3960 item does extend the htmlRef item.
3961
3962 Another example: >
3963 :syn region xmlFold start="<a>" end="</a>" fold transparent keepend extend
3964< This defines a region with "keepend", so that its end cannot be
3965 changed by contained items, like when the "</a>" is matched to
3966 highlight it differently. But when the xmlFold region is nested (it
3967 includes itself), the "extend" applies, so that the "</a>" of a nested
3968 region only ends that region, and not the one it is contained in.
3969
3970 *:syn-excludenl*
3971 When a pattern for a match or end pattern of a region includes a '$'
3972 to match the end-of-line, it will make a region item that it is
3973 contained in continue on the next line. For example, a match with
3974 "\\$" (backslash at the end of the line) can make a region continue
3975 that would normally stop at the end of the line. This is the default
3976 behavior. If this is not wanted, there are two ways to avoid it:
3977 1. Use "keepend" for the containing item. This will keep all
3978 contained matches from extending the match or region. It can be
3979 used when all contained items must not extend the containing item.
3980 2. Use "excludenl" in the contained item. This will keep that match
3981 from extending the containing match or region. It can be used if
3982 only some contained items must not extend the containing item.
3983 "excludenl" must be given before the pattern it applies to.
3984
3985 *:syn-matchgroup*
3986 "matchgroup" can be used to highlight the start and/or end pattern
3987 differently than the body of the region. Example: >
3988 :syntax region String matchgroup=Quote start=+"+ skip=+\\"+ end=+"+
3989< This will highlight the quotes with the "Quote" group, and the text in
3990 between with the "String" group.
3991 The "matchgroup" is used for all start and end patterns that follow,
3992 until the next "matchgroup". Use "matchgroup=NONE" to go back to not
3993 using a matchgroup.
3994
3995 In a start or end pattern that is highlighted with "matchgroup" the
3996 contained items of the region are not used. This can be used to avoid
3997 that a contained item matches in the start or end pattern match. When
3998 using "transparent", this does not apply to a start or end pattern
3999 match that is highlighted with "matchgroup".
4000
4001 Here is an example, which highlights three levels of parentheses in
4002 different colors: >
4003 :sy region par1 matchgroup=par1 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par2
4004 :sy region par2 matchgroup=par2 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par3 contained
4005 :sy region par3 matchgroup=par3 start=/(/ end=/)/ contains=par1 contained
4006 :hi par1 ctermfg=red guifg=red
4007 :hi par2 ctermfg=blue guifg=blue
4008 :hi par3 ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004009<
4010 *E849*
4011The maximum number of syntax groups is 19999.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004012
4013==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010040147. :syntax arguments *:syn-arguments*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004015
4016The :syntax commands that define syntax items take a number of arguments.
4017The common ones are explained here. The arguments may be given in any order
4018and may be mixed with patterns.
4019
4020Not all commands accept all arguments. This table shows which arguments
4021can not be used for all commands:
Bram Moolenaar09092152010-08-08 16:38:42 +02004022 *E395*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004023 contains oneline fold display extend concealends~
4024:syntax keyword - - - - - -
4025:syntax match yes - yes yes yes -
4026:syntax region yes yes yes yes yes yes
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004027
4028These arguments can be used for all three commands:
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004029 conceal
4030 cchar
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004031 contained
4032 containedin
4033 nextgroup
4034 transparent
4035 skipwhite
4036 skipnl
4037 skipempty
4038
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004039conceal *conceal* *:syn-conceal*
4040
4041When the "conceal" argument is given, the item is marked as concealable.
Bram Moolenaar370df582010-06-22 05:16:38 +02004042Whether or not it is actually concealed depends on the value of the
Bram Moolenaarf5963f72010-07-23 22:10:27 +02004043'conceallevel' option. The 'concealcursor' option is used to decide whether
4044concealable items in the current line are displayed unconcealed to be able to
4045edit the line.
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02004046Another way to conceal text is with |matchadd()|.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004047
4048concealends *:syn-concealends*
4049
4050When the "concealends" argument is given, the start and end matches of
4051the region, but not the contents of the region, are marked as concealable.
4052Whether or not they are actually concealed depends on the setting on the
4053'conceallevel' option. The ends of a region can only be concealed separately
4054in this way when they have their own highlighting via "matchgroup"
4055
4056cchar *:syn-cchar*
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004057 *E844*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004058The "cchar" argument defines the character shown in place of the item
4059when it is concealed (setting "cchar" only makes sense when the conceal
4060argument is given.) If "cchar" is not set then the default conceal
Bram Moolenaard58e9292011-02-09 17:07:58 +01004061character defined in the 'listchars' option is used. The character cannot be
4062a control character such as Tab. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004063 :syntax match Entity "&amp;" conceal cchar=&
Bram Moolenaar9028b102010-07-11 16:58:51 +02004064See |hl-Conceal| for highlighting.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004065
4066contained *:syn-contained*
4067
4068When the "contained" argument is given, this item will not be recognized at
4069the top level, but only when it is mentioned in the "contains" field of
4070another match. Example: >
4071 :syntax keyword Todo TODO contained
4072 :syntax match Comment "//.*" contains=Todo
4073
4074
4075display *:syn-display*
4076
4077If the "display" argument is given, this item will be skipped when the
4078detected highlighting will not be displayed. This will speed up highlighting,
4079by skipping this item when only finding the syntax state for the text that is
4080to be displayed.
4081
4082Generally, you can use "display" for match and region items that meet these
4083conditions:
4084- The item does not continue past the end of a line. Example for C: A region
4085 for a "/*" comment can't contain "display", because it continues on the next
4086 line.
4087- The item does not contain items that continue past the end of the line or
4088 make it continue on the next line.
4089- The item does not change the size of any item it is contained in. Example
4090 for C: A match with "\\$" in a preprocessor match can't have "display",
4091 because it may make that preprocessor match shorter.
4092- The item does not allow other items to match that didn't match otherwise,
4093 and that item may extend the match too far. Example for C: A match for a
4094 "//" comment can't use "display", because a "/*" inside that comment would
4095 match then and start a comment which extends past the end of the line.
4096
4097Examples, for the C language, where "display" can be used:
4098- match with a number
4099- match with a label
4100
4101
4102transparent *:syn-transparent*
4103
4104If the "transparent" argument is given, this item will not be highlighted
4105itself, but will take the highlighting of the item it is contained in. This
4106is useful for syntax items that don't need any highlighting but are used
4107only to skip over a part of the text.
4108
4109The "contains=" argument is also inherited from the item it is contained in,
4110unless a "contains" argument is given for the transparent item itself. To
4111avoid that unwanted items are contained, use "contains=NONE". Example, which
4112highlights words in strings, but makes an exception for "vim": >
4113 :syn match myString /'[^']*'/ contains=myWord,myVim
4114 :syn match myWord /\<[a-z]*\>/ contained
4115 :syn match myVim /\<vim\>/ transparent contained contains=NONE
4116 :hi link myString String
4117 :hi link myWord Comment
4118Since the "myVim" match comes after "myWord" it is the preferred match (last
4119match in the same position overrules an earlier one). The "transparent"
4120argument makes the "myVim" match use the same highlighting as "myString". But
4121it does not contain anything. If the "contains=NONE" argument would be left
4122out, then "myVim" would use the contains argument from myString and allow
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02004123"myWord" to be contained, which will be highlighted as a Comment. This
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004124happens because a contained match doesn't match inside itself in the same
4125position, thus the "myVim" match doesn't overrule the "myWord" match here.
4126
4127When you look at the colored text, it is like looking at layers of contained
4128items. The contained item is on top of the item it is contained in, thus you
4129see the contained item. When a contained item is transparent, you can look
4130through, thus you see the item it is contained in. In a picture:
4131
4132 look from here
4133
4134 | | | | | |
4135 V V V V V V
4136
4137 xxxx yyy more contained items
4138 .................... contained item (transparent)
4139 ============================= first item
4140
4141The 'x', 'y' and '=' represent a highlighted syntax item. The '.' represent a
4142transparent group.
4143
4144What you see is:
4145
4146 =======xxxx=======yyy========
4147
4148Thus you look through the transparent "....".
4149
4150
4151oneline *:syn-oneline*
4152
4153The "oneline" argument indicates that the region does not cross a line
4154boundary. It must match completely in the current line. However, when the
4155region has a contained item that does cross a line boundary, it continues on
4156the next line anyway. A contained item can be used to recognize a line
4157continuation pattern. But the "end" pattern must still match in the first
4158line, otherwise the region doesn't even start.
4159
4160When the start pattern includes a "\n" to match an end-of-line, the end
4161pattern must be found in the same line as where the start pattern ends. The
4162end pattern may also include an end-of-line. Thus the "oneline" argument
4163means that the end of the start pattern and the start of the end pattern must
4164be within one line. This can't be changed by a skip pattern that matches a
4165line break.
4166
4167
4168fold *:syn-fold*
4169
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004170The "fold" argument makes the fold level increase by one for this item.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004171Example: >
4172 :syn region myFold start="{" end="}" transparent fold
4173 :syn sync fromstart
4174 :set foldmethod=syntax
4175This will make each {} block form one fold.
4176
4177The fold will start on the line where the item starts, and end where the item
4178ends. If the start and end are within the same line, there is no fold.
4179The 'foldnestmax' option limits the nesting of syntax folds.
Bram Moolenaare35a52a2020-05-31 19:48:53 +02004180See |:syn-foldlevel| to control how the foldlevel of a line is computed
4181from its syntax items.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004182{not available when Vim was compiled without |+folding| feature}
4183
4184
4185 *:syn-contains* *E405* *E406* *E407* *E408* *E409*
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004186contains={group-name},..
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004187
4188The "contains" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. These
4189groups will be allowed to begin inside the item (they may extend past the
4190containing group's end). This allows for recursive nesting of matches and
4191regions. If there is no "contains" argument, no groups will be contained in
4192this item. The group names do not need to be defined before they can be used
4193here.
4194
4195contains=ALL
4196 If the only item in the contains list is "ALL", then all
4197 groups will be accepted inside the item.
4198
4199contains=ALLBUT,{group-name},..
4200 If the first item in the contains list is "ALLBUT", then all
4201 groups will be accepted inside the item, except the ones that
4202 are listed. Example: >
4203 :syntax region Block start="{" end="}" ... contains=ALLBUT,Function
4204
4205contains=TOP
4206 If the first item in the contains list is "TOP", then all
4207 groups will be accepted that don't have the "contained"
4208 argument.
4209contains=TOP,{group-name},..
4210 Like "TOP", but excluding the groups that are listed.
4211
4212contains=CONTAINED
4213 If the first item in the contains list is "CONTAINED", then
4214 all groups will be accepted that have the "contained"
4215 argument.
4216contains=CONTAINED,{group-name},..
4217 Like "CONTAINED", but excluding the groups that are
4218 listed.
4219
4220
4221The {group-name} in the "contains" list can be a pattern. All group names
4222that match the pattern will be included (or excluded, if "ALLBUT" is used).
4223The pattern cannot contain white space or a ','. Example: >
4224 ... contains=Comment.*,Keyw[0-3]
4225The matching will be done at moment the syntax command is executed. Groups
4226that are defined later will not be matched. Also, if the current syntax
4227command defines a new group, it is not matched. Be careful: When putting
4228syntax commands in a file you can't rely on groups NOT being defined, because
4229the file may have been sourced before, and ":syn clear" doesn't remove the
4230group names.
4231
4232The contained groups will also match in the start and end patterns of a
4233region. If this is not wanted, the "matchgroup" argument can be used
4234|:syn-matchgroup|. The "ms=" and "me=" offsets can be used to change the
4235region where contained items do match. Note that this may also limit the
4236area that is highlighted
4237
4238
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004239containedin={group-name}... *:syn-containedin*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004240
4241The "containedin" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names. The
4242item will be allowed to begin inside these groups. This works as if the
4243containing item has a "contains=" argument that includes this item.
4244
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004245The {group-name}... can be used just like for "contains", as explained above.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004246
4247This is useful when adding a syntax item afterwards. An item can be told to
4248be included inside an already existing item, without changing the definition
4249of that item. For example, to highlight a word in a C comment after loading
4250the C syntax: >
4251 :syn keyword myword HELP containedin=cComment contained
4252Note that "contained" is also used, to avoid that the item matches at the top
4253level.
4254
4255Matches for "containedin" are added to the other places where the item can
4256appear. A "contains" argument may also be added as usual. Don't forget that
4257keywords never contain another item, thus adding them to "containedin" won't
4258work.
4259
4260
Bram Moolenaar3a991dd2014-10-02 01:41:41 +02004261nextgroup={group-name},.. *:syn-nextgroup*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004262
4263The "nextgroup" argument is followed by a list of syntax group names,
4264separated by commas (just like with "contains", so you can also use patterns).
4265
4266If the "nextgroup" argument is given, the mentioned syntax groups will be
4267tried for a match, after the match or region ends. If none of the groups have
4268a match, highlighting continues normally. If there is a match, this group
4269will be used, even when it is not mentioned in the "contains" field of the
4270current group. This is like giving the mentioned group priority over all
4271other groups. Example: >
4272 :syntax match ccFoobar "Foo.\{-}Bar" contains=ccFoo
4273 :syntax match ccFoo "Foo" contained nextgroup=ccFiller
4274 :syntax region ccFiller start="." matchgroup=ccBar end="Bar" contained
4275
4276This will highlight "Foo" and "Bar" differently, and only when there is a
4277"Bar" after "Foo". In the text line below, "f" shows where ccFoo is used for
4278highlighting, and "bbb" where ccBar is used. >
4279
4280 Foo asdfasd Bar asdf Foo asdf Bar asdf
4281 fff bbb fff bbb
4282
4283Note the use of ".\{-}" to skip as little as possible until the next Bar.
4284when ".*" would be used, the "asdf" in between "Bar" and "Foo" would be
4285highlighted according to the "ccFoobar" group, because the ccFooBar match
4286would include the first "Foo" and the last "Bar" in the line (see |pattern|).
4287
4288
4289skipwhite *:syn-skipwhite*
4290skipnl *:syn-skipnl*
4291skipempty *:syn-skipempty*
4292
4293These arguments are only used in combination with "nextgroup". They can be
4294used to allow the next group to match after skipping some text:
Bram Moolenaardd2a0d82007-05-12 15:07:00 +00004295 skipwhite skip over space and tab characters
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004296 skipnl skip over the end of a line
4297 skipempty skip over empty lines (implies a "skipnl")
4298
4299When "skipwhite" is present, the white space is only skipped if there is no
4300next group that matches the white space.
4301
4302When "skipnl" is present, the match with nextgroup may be found in the next
4303line. This only happens when the current item ends at the end of the current
4304line! When "skipnl" is not present, the nextgroup will only be found after
4305the current item in the same line.
4306
4307When skipping text while looking for a next group, the matches for other
4308groups are ignored. Only when no next group matches, other items are tried
4309for a match again. This means that matching a next group and skipping white
4310space and <EOL>s has a higher priority than other items.
4311
4312Example: >
4313 :syn match ifstart "\<if.*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty
4314 :syn match ifline "[^ \t].*" nextgroup=ifline skipwhite skipempty contained
4315 :syn match ifline "endif" contained
4316Note that the "[^ \t].*" match matches all non-white text. Thus it would also
4317match "endif". Therefore the "endif" match is put last, so that it takes
4318precedence.
4319Note that this example doesn't work for nested "if"s. You need to add
4320"contains" arguments to make that work (omitted for simplicity of the
4321example).
4322
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02004323IMPLICIT CONCEAL *:syn-conceal-implicit*
4324
4325:sy[ntax] conceal [on|off]
4326 This defines if the following ":syntax" commands will define keywords,
4327 matches or regions with the "conceal" flag set. After ":syn conceal
4328 on", all subsequent ":syn keyword", ":syn match" or ":syn region"
4329 defined will have the "conceal" flag set implicitly. ":syn conceal
4330 off" returns to the normal state where the "conceal" flag must be
4331 given explicitly.
4332
Bram Moolenaar690afe12017-01-28 18:34:47 +01004333:sy[ntax] conceal
4334 Show either "syntax conceal on" or "syntax conceal off" (translated).
4335
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004336==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010043378. Syntax patterns *:syn-pattern* *E401* *E402*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004338
4339In the syntax commands, a pattern must be surrounded by two identical
4340characters. This is like it works for the ":s" command. The most common to
4341use is the double quote. But if the pattern contains a double quote, you can
4342use another character that is not used in the pattern. Examples: >
4343 :syntax region Comment start="/\*" end="\*/"
4344 :syntax region String start=+"+ end=+"+ skip=+\\"+
4345
4346See |pattern| for the explanation of what a pattern is. Syntax patterns are
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004347always interpreted like the 'magic' option is set, no matter what the actual
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004348value of 'magic' is. And the patterns are interpreted like the 'l' flag is
4349not included in 'cpoptions'. This was done to make syntax files portable and
4350independent of 'compatible' and 'magic' settings.
4351
4352Try to avoid patterns that can match an empty string, such as "[a-z]*".
4353This slows down the highlighting a lot, because it matches everywhere.
4354
4355 *:syn-pattern-offset*
4356The pattern can be followed by a character offset. This can be used to
4357change the highlighted part, and to change the text area included in the
4358match or region (which only matters when trying to match other items). Both
4359are relative to the matched pattern. The character offset for a skip
4360pattern can be used to tell where to continue looking for an end pattern.
4361
4362The offset takes the form of "{what}={offset}"
4363The {what} can be one of seven strings:
4364
4365ms Match Start offset for the start of the matched text
4366me Match End offset for the end of the matched text
4367hs Highlight Start offset for where the highlighting starts
4368he Highlight End offset for where the highlighting ends
4369rs Region Start offset for where the body of a region starts
4370re Region End offset for where the body of a region ends
4371lc Leading Context offset past "leading context" of pattern
4372
4373The {offset} can be:
4374
4375s start of the matched pattern
4376s+{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4377s-{nr} start of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
4378e end of the matched pattern
4379e+{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the right
4380e-{nr} end of the matched pattern plus {nr} chars to the left
Bram Moolenaarac7bd632013-03-19 11:35:58 +01004381{nr} (for "lc" only): start matching {nr} chars right of the start
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004382
4383Examples: "ms=s+1", "hs=e-2", "lc=3".
4384
4385Although all offsets are accepted after any pattern, they are not always
4386meaningful. This table shows which offsets are actually used:
4387
4388 ms me hs he rs re lc ~
4389match item yes yes yes yes - - yes
4390region item start yes - yes - yes - yes
4391region item skip - yes - - - - yes
4392region item end - yes - yes - yes yes
4393
4394Offsets can be concatenated, with a ',' in between. Example: >
4395 :syn match String /"[^"]*"/hs=s+1,he=e-1
4396<
4397 some "string" text
4398 ^^^^^^ highlighted
4399
4400Notes:
4401- There must be no white space between the pattern and the character
4402 offset(s).
4403- The highlighted area will never be outside of the matched text.
4404- A negative offset for an end pattern may not always work, because the end
4405 pattern may be detected when the highlighting should already have stopped.
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004406- Before Vim 7.2 the offsets were counted in bytes instead of characters.
Bram Moolenaar207f0092020-08-30 17:20:20 +02004407 This didn't work well for multibyte characters, so it was changed with the
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004408 Vim 7.2 release.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004409- The start of a match cannot be in a line other than where the pattern
4410 matched. This doesn't work: "a\nb"ms=e. You can make the highlighting
4411 start in another line, this does work: "a\nb"hs=e.
4412
4413Example (match a comment but don't highlight the /* and */): >
4414 :syntax region Comment start="/\*"hs=e+1 end="\*/"he=s-1
4415<
4416 /* this is a comment */
4417 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ highlighted
4418
4419A more complicated Example: >
4420 :syn region Exa matchgroup=Foo start="foo"hs=s+2,rs=e+2 matchgroup=Bar end="bar"me=e-1,he=e-1,re=s-1
4421<
4422 abcfoostringbarabc
4423 mmmmmmmmmmm match
Bram Moolenaar4770d092006-01-12 23:22:24 +00004424 sssrrreee highlight start/region/end ("Foo", "Exa" and "Bar")
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004425
4426Leading context *:syn-lc* *:syn-leading* *:syn-context*
4427
4428Note: This is an obsolete feature, only included for backwards compatibility
4429with previous Vim versions. It's now recommended to use the |/\@<=| construct
4430in the pattern.
4431
4432The "lc" offset specifies leading context -- a part of the pattern that must
4433be present, but is not considered part of the match. An offset of "lc=n" will
4434cause Vim to step back n columns before attempting the pattern match, allowing
4435characters which have already been matched in previous patterns to also be
4436used as leading context for this match. This can be used, for instance, to
4437specify that an "escaping" character must not precede the match: >
4438
4439 :syn match ZNoBackslash "[^\\]z"ms=s+1
4440 :syn match WNoBackslash "[^\\]w"lc=1
4441 :syn match Underline "_\+"
4442<
4443 ___zzzz ___wwww
4444 ^^^ ^^^ matches Underline
4445 ^ ^ matches ZNoBackslash
4446 ^^^^ matches WNoBackslash
4447
4448The "ms" offset is automatically set to the same value as the "lc" offset,
4449unless you set "ms" explicitly.
4450
4451
4452Multi-line patterns *:syn-multi-line*
4453
4454The patterns can include "\n" to match an end-of-line. Mostly this works as
4455expected, but there are a few exceptions.
4456
4457When using a start pattern with an offset, the start of the match is not
4458allowed to start in a following line. The highlighting can start in a
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004459following line though. Using the "\zs" item also requires that the start of
4460the match doesn't move to another line.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004461
4462The skip pattern can include the "\n", but the search for an end pattern will
4463continue in the first character of the next line, also when that character is
4464matched by the skip pattern. This is because redrawing may start in any line
4465halfway a region and there is no check if the skip pattern started in a
4466previous line. For example, if the skip pattern is "a\nb" and an end pattern
4467is "b", the end pattern does match in the second line of this: >
4468 x x a
4469 b x x
4470Generally this means that the skip pattern should not match any characters
4471after the "\n".
4472
4473
4474External matches *:syn-ext-match*
4475
4476These extra regular expression items are available in region patterns:
4477
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02004478 */\z(* */\z(\)* *E50* *E52* *E879*
Bram Moolenaara3e6bc92013-01-30 14:18:00 +01004479 \z(\) Marks the sub-expression as "external", meaning that it can be
4480 accessed from another pattern match. Currently only usable in
4481 defining a syntax region start pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004482
4483 */\z1* */\z2* */\z3* */\z4* */\z5*
4484 \z1 ... \z9 */\z6* */\z7* */\z8* */\z9* *E66* *E67*
4485 Matches the same string that was matched by the corresponding
4486 sub-expression in a previous start pattern match.
4487
4488Sometimes the start and end patterns of a region need to share a common
4489sub-expression. A common example is the "here" document in Perl and many Unix
4490shells. This effect can be achieved with the "\z" special regular expression
4491items, which marks a sub-expression as "external", in the sense that it can be
4492referenced from outside the pattern in which it is defined. The here-document
4493example, for instance, can be done like this: >
4494 :syn region hereDoc start="<<\z(\I\i*\)" end="^\z1$"
4495
4496As can be seen here, the \z actually does double duty. In the start pattern,
4497it marks the "\(\I\i*\)" sub-expression as external; in the end pattern, it
Bram Moolenaarb4ff5182015-11-10 21:15:48 +01004498changes the \z1 back-reference into an external reference referring to the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004499first external sub-expression in the start pattern. External references can
4500also be used in skip patterns: >
4501 :syn region foo start="start \(\I\i*\)" skip="not end \z1" end="end \z1"
4502
4503Note that normal and external sub-expressions are completely orthogonal and
4504indexed separately; for instance, if the pattern "\z(..\)\(..\)" is applied
4505to the string "aabb", then \1 will refer to "bb" and \z1 will refer to "aa".
4506Note also that external sub-expressions cannot be accessed as back-references
4507within the same pattern like normal sub-expressions. If you want to use one
4508sub-expression as both a normal and an external sub-expression, you can nest
4509the two, as in "\(\z(...\)\)".
4510
4511Note that only matches within a single line can be used. Multi-line matches
4512cannot be referred to.
4513
4514==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +010045159. Syntax clusters *:syn-cluster* *E400*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004516
4517:sy[ntax] cluster {cluster-name} [contains={group-name}..]
4518 [add={group-name}..]
4519 [remove={group-name}..]
4520
4521This command allows you to cluster a list of syntax groups together under a
4522single name.
4523
4524 contains={group-name}..
4525 The cluster is set to the specified list of groups.
4526 add={group-name}..
4527 The specified groups are added to the cluster.
4528 remove={group-name}..
4529 The specified groups are removed from the cluster.
4530
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00004531A cluster so defined may be referred to in a contains=.., containedin=..,
4532nextgroup=.., add=.. or remove=.. list with a "@" prefix. You can also use
4533this notation to implicitly declare a cluster before specifying its contents.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004534
4535Example: >
4536 :syntax match Thing "# [^#]\+ #" contains=@ThingMembers
4537 :syntax cluster ThingMembers contains=ThingMember1,ThingMember2
4538
4539As the previous example suggests, modifications to a cluster are effectively
4540retroactive; the membership of the cluster is checked at the last minute, so
4541to speak: >
4542 :syntax keyword A aaa
4543 :syntax keyword B bbb
4544 :syntax cluster AandB contains=A
4545 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@AandB
4546 :syntax cluster AandB add=B " now both keywords are matched in Stuff
4547
4548This also has implications for nested clusters: >
4549 :syntax keyword A aaa
4550 :syntax keyword B bbb
4551 :syntax cluster SmallGroup contains=B
4552 :syntax cluster BigGroup contains=A,@SmallGroup
4553 :syntax match Stuff "( aaa bbb )" contains=@BigGroup
4554 :syntax cluster BigGroup remove=B " no effect, since B isn't in BigGroup
4555 :syntax cluster SmallGroup remove=B " now bbb isn't matched within Stuff
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004556<
4557 *E848*
4558The maximum number of clusters is 9767.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004559
4560==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100456110. Including syntax files *:syn-include* *E397*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004562
4563It is often useful for one language's syntax file to include a syntax file for
4564a related language. Depending on the exact relationship, this can be done in
4565two different ways:
4566
4567 - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4568 allowed at the top level in the including syntax, you can simply use
4569 the |:runtime| command: >
4570
4571 " In cpp.vim:
4572 :runtime! syntax/c.vim
4573 :unlet b:current_syntax
4574
4575< - If top-level syntax items in the included syntax file are to be
4576 contained within a region in the including syntax, you can use the
4577 ":syntax include" command:
4578
4579:sy[ntax] include [@{grouplist-name}] {file-name}
4580
4581 All syntax items declared in the included file will have the
4582 "contained" flag added. In addition, if a group list is specified,
4583 all top-level syntax items in the included file will be added to
4584 that list. >
4585
4586 " In perl.vim:
4587 :syntax include @Pod <sfile>:p:h/pod.vim
4588 :syntax region perlPOD start="^=head" end="^=cut" contains=@Pod
4589<
4590 When {file-name} is an absolute path (starts with "/", "c:", "$VAR"
4591 or "<sfile>") that file is sourced. When it is a relative path
4592 (e.g., "syntax/pod.vim") the file is searched for in 'runtimepath'.
4593 All matching files are loaded. Using a relative path is
4594 recommended, because it allows a user to replace the included file
Bram Moolenaareab6dff2020-03-01 19:06:45 +01004595 with their own version, without replacing the file that does the
4596 ":syn include".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004597
Bram Moolenaaradc21822011-04-01 18:03:16 +02004598 *E847*
4599The maximum number of includes is 999.
4600
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004601==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100460211. Synchronizing *:syn-sync* *E403* *E404*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004603
4604Vim wants to be able to start redrawing in any position in the document. To
4605make this possible it needs to know the syntax state at the position where
4606redrawing starts.
4607
4608:sy[ntax] sync [ccomment [group-name] | minlines={N} | ...]
4609
4610There are four ways to synchronize:
46111. Always parse from the start of the file.
4612 |:syn-sync-first|
46132. Based on C-style comments. Vim understands how C-comments work and can
4614 figure out if the current line starts inside or outside a comment.
4615 |:syn-sync-second|
46163. Jumping back a certain number of lines and start parsing there.
4617 |:syn-sync-third|
46184. Searching backwards in the text for a pattern to sync on.
4619 |:syn-sync-fourth|
4620
4621 *:syn-sync-maxlines* *:syn-sync-minlines*
4622For the last three methods, the line range where the parsing can start is
4623limited by "minlines" and "maxlines".
4624
4625If the "minlines={N}" argument is given, the parsing always starts at least
4626that many lines backwards. This can be used if the parsing may take a few
4627lines before it's correct, or when it's not possible to use syncing.
4628
4629If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given, the number of lines that are searched
4630for a comment or syncing pattern is restricted to N lines backwards (after
4631adding "minlines"). This is useful if you have few things to sync on and a
4632slow machine. Example: >
Bram Moolenaar2b8388b2015-02-28 13:11:45 +01004633 :syntax sync maxlines=500 ccomment
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004634<
4635 *:syn-sync-linebreaks*
4636When using a pattern that matches multiple lines, a change in one line may
4637cause a pattern to no longer match in a previous line. This means has to
4638start above where the change was made. How many lines can be specified with
4639the "linebreaks" argument. For example, when a pattern may include one line
4640break use this: >
4641 :syntax sync linebreaks=1
4642The result is that redrawing always starts at least one line before where a
4643change was made. The default value for "linebreaks" is zero. Usually the
4644value for "minlines" is bigger than "linebreaks".
4645
4646
4647First syncing method: *:syn-sync-first*
4648>
4649 :syntax sync fromstart
4650
4651The file will be parsed from the start. This makes syntax highlighting
4652accurate, but can be slow for long files. Vim caches previously parsed text,
4653so that it's only slow when parsing the text for the first time. However,
Bram Moolenaarf1568ec2011-12-14 21:17:39 +01004654when making changes some part of the text needs to be parsed again (worst
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004655case: to the end of the file).
4656
4657Using "fromstart" is equivalent to using "minlines" with a very large number.
4658
4659
4660Second syncing method: *:syn-sync-second* *:syn-sync-ccomment*
4661
4662For the second method, only the "ccomment" argument needs to be given.
4663Example: >
4664 :syntax sync ccomment
4665
4666When Vim finds that the line where displaying starts is inside a C-style
4667comment, the last region syntax item with the group-name "Comment" will be
4668used. This requires that there is a region with the group-name "Comment"!
4669An alternate group name can be specified, for example: >
4670 :syntax sync ccomment javaComment
4671This means that the last item specified with "syn region javaComment" will be
4672used for the detected C comment region. This only works properly if that
4673region does have a start pattern "\/*" and an end pattern "*\/".
4674
4675The "maxlines" argument can be used to restrict the search to a number of
4676lines. The "minlines" argument can be used to at least start a number of
4677lines back (e.g., for when there is some construct that only takes a few
4678lines, but it hard to sync on).
4679
4680Note: Syncing on a C comment doesn't work properly when strings are used
4681that cross a line and contain a "*/". Since letting strings cross a line
4682is a bad programming habit (many compilers give a warning message), and the
4683chance of a "*/" appearing inside a comment is very small, this restriction
4684is hardly ever noticed.
4685
4686
4687Third syncing method: *:syn-sync-third*
4688
4689For the third method, only the "minlines={N}" argument needs to be given.
4690Vim will subtract {N} from the line number and start parsing there. This
4691means {N} extra lines need to be parsed, which makes this method a bit slower.
4692Example: >
4693 :syntax sync minlines=50
4694
4695"lines" is equivalent to "minlines" (used by older versions).
4696
4697
4698Fourth syncing method: *:syn-sync-fourth*
4699
4700The idea is to synchronize on the end of a few specific regions, called a
4701sync pattern. Only regions can cross lines, so when we find the end of some
4702region, we might be able to know in which syntax item we are. The search
4703starts in the line just above the one where redrawing starts. From there
4704the search continues backwards in the file.
4705
4706This works just like the non-syncing syntax items. You can use contained
4707matches, nextgroup, etc. But there are a few differences:
4708- Keywords cannot be used.
4709- The syntax items with the "sync" keyword form a completely separated group
4710 of syntax items. You can't mix syncing groups and non-syncing groups.
4711- The matching works backwards in the buffer (line by line), instead of
4712 forwards.
4713- A line continuation pattern can be given. It is used to decide which group
4714 of lines need to be searched like they were one line. This means that the
4715 search for a match with the specified items starts in the first of the
Bram Moolenaarc8cdf0f2021-03-13 13:28:13 +01004716 consecutive lines that contain the continuation pattern.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004717- When using "nextgroup" or "contains", this only works within one line (or
4718 group of continued lines).
4719- When using a region, it must start and end in the same line (or group of
4720 continued lines). Otherwise the end is assumed to be at the end of the
4721 line (or group of continued lines).
4722- When a match with a sync pattern is found, the rest of the line (or group of
4723 continued lines) is searched for another match. The last match is used.
4724 This is used when a line can contain both the start end the end of a region
4725 (e.g., in a C-comment like /* this */, the last "*/" is used).
4726
4727There are two ways how a match with a sync pattern can be used:
47281. Parsing for highlighting starts where redrawing starts (and where the
4729 search for the sync pattern started). The syntax group that is expected
4730 to be valid there must be specified. This works well when the regions
4731 that cross lines cannot contain other regions.
47322. Parsing for highlighting continues just after the match. The syntax group
4733 that is expected to be present just after the match must be specified.
4734 This can be used when the previous method doesn't work well. It's much
4735 slower, because more text needs to be parsed.
4736Both types of sync patterns can be used at the same time.
4737
4738Besides the sync patterns, other matches and regions can be specified, to
4739avoid finding unwanted matches.
4740
4741[The reason that the sync patterns are given separately, is that mostly the
4742search for the sync point can be much simpler than figuring out the
4743highlighting. The reduced number of patterns means it will go (much)
4744faster.]
4745
4746 *syn-sync-grouphere* *E393* *E394*
4747 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} grouphere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4748
4749 Define a match that is used for syncing. {group-name} is the
4750 name of a syntax group that follows just after the match. Parsing
4751 of the text for highlighting starts just after the match. A region
4752 must exist for this {group-name}. The first one defined will be used.
4753 "NONE" can be used for when there is no syntax group after the match.
4754
4755 *syn-sync-groupthere*
4756 :syntax sync match {sync-group-name} groupthere {group-name} "pattern" ..
4757
4758 Like "grouphere", but {group-name} is the name of a syntax group that
4759 is to be used at the start of the line where searching for the sync
4760 point started. The text between the match and the start of the sync
4761 pattern searching is assumed not to change the syntax highlighting.
4762 For example, in C you could search backwards for "/*" and "*/". If
4763 "/*" is found first, you know that you are inside a comment, so the
4764 "groupthere" is "cComment". If "*/" is found first, you know that you
4765 are not in a comment, so the "groupthere" is "NONE". (in practice
4766 it's a bit more complicated, because the "/*" and "*/" could appear
4767 inside a string. That's left as an exercise to the reader...).
4768
4769 :syntax sync match ..
4770 :syntax sync region ..
4771
4772 Without a "groupthere" argument. Define a region or match that is
4773 skipped while searching for a sync point.
4774
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004775 *syn-sync-linecont*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004776 :syntax sync linecont {pattern}
4777
4778 When {pattern} matches in a line, it is considered to continue in
4779 the next line. This means that the search for a sync point will
4780 consider the lines to be concatenated.
4781
4782If the "maxlines={N}" argument is given too, the number of lines that are
4783searched for a match is restricted to N. This is useful if you have very
4784few things to sync on and a slow machine. Example: >
4785 :syntax sync maxlines=100
4786
4787You can clear all sync settings with: >
4788 :syntax sync clear
4789
4790You can clear specific sync patterns with: >
4791 :syntax sync clear {sync-group-name} ..
4792
4793==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100479412. Listing syntax items *:syntax* *:sy* *:syn* *:syn-list*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004795
Bram Moolenaar482aaeb2005-09-29 18:26:07 +00004796This command lists all the syntax items: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004797
4798 :sy[ntax] [list]
4799
4800To show the syntax items for one syntax group: >
4801
4802 :sy[ntax] list {group-name}
4803
Bram Moolenaar24ea3ba2010-09-19 19:01:21 +02004804To list the syntax groups in one cluster: *E392* >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004805
4806 :sy[ntax] list @{cluster-name}
4807
4808See above for other arguments for the ":syntax" command.
4809
4810Note that the ":syntax" command can be abbreviated to ":sy", although ":syn"
4811is mostly used, because it looks better.
4812
4813==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100481413. Highlight command *:highlight* *:hi* *E28* *E411* *E415*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004815
4816There are three types of highlight groups:
4817- The ones used for specific languages. For these the name starts with the
4818 name of the language. Many of these don't have any attributes, but are
4819 linked to a group of the second type.
4820- The ones used for all syntax languages.
4821- The ones used for the 'highlight' option.
4822 *hitest.vim*
4823You can see all the groups currently active with this command: >
4824 :so $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/hitest.vim
4825This will open a new window containing all highlight group names, displayed
4826in their own color.
4827
4828 *:colo* *:colorscheme* *E185*
Bram Moolenaar00a927d2010-05-14 23:24:24 +02004829:colo[rscheme] Output the name of the currently active color scheme.
4830 This is basically the same as >
4831 :echo g:colors_name
4832< In case g:colors_name has not been defined :colo will
4833 output "default". When compiled without the |+eval|
4834 feature it will output "unknown".
4835
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004836:colo[rscheme] {name} Load color scheme {name}. This searches 'runtimepath'
Bram Moolenaarbc488a72013-07-05 21:01:22 +02004837 for the file "colors/{name}.vim". The first one that
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004838 is found is loaded.
Bram Moolenaare18c0b32016-03-20 21:08:34 +01004839 Also searches all plugins in 'packpath', first below
4840 "start" and then under "opt".
4841
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01004842 Doesn't work recursively, thus you can't use
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004843 ":colorscheme" in a color scheme script.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004844
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004845 You have two options for customizing a color scheme.
4846 For changing the appearance of specific colors, you
4847 can redefine a color name before loading the scheme.
4848 The desert scheme uses the khaki color for the cursor.
4849 To use a darker variation of the same color: >
4850
4851 let v:colornames['khaki'] = '#bdb76b'
4852 colorscheme desert
4853<
4854 For further customization, such as changing
4855 |:highlight-link| associations, use another name, e.g.
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004856 "~/.vim/colors/mine.vim", and use `:runtime` to load
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004857 the original color scheme: >
Bram Moolenaarb4ada792016-10-30 21:55:26 +01004858 runtime colors/evening.vim
4859 hi Statement ctermfg=Blue guifg=Blue
4860
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004861< Before the color scheme will be loaded all default
4862 color list scripts (`colors/lists/default.vim`) will
4863 be executed and then the |ColorSchemePre| autocommand
4864 event is triggered. After the color scheme has been
4865 loaded the |ColorScheme| autocommand event is
4866 triggered.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02004867 For info about writing a color scheme file: >
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00004868 :edit $VIMRUNTIME/colors/README.txt
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004869
4870:hi[ghlight] List all the current highlight groups that have
4871 attributes set.
4872
4873:hi[ghlight] {group-name}
4874 List one highlight group.
4875
Yegappan Lakshmanand1a8d652021-11-03 21:56:45 +00004876 *highlight-clear*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004877:hi[ghlight] clear Reset all highlighting to the defaults. Removes all
4878 highlighting for groups added by the user!
4879 Uses the current value of 'background' to decide which
4880 default colors to use.
Bram Moolenaar213da552020-09-17 19:59:26 +02004881 If there was a default link, restore it. |:hi-link|
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004882
4883:hi[ghlight] clear {group-name}
4884:hi[ghlight] {group-name} NONE
4885 Disable the highlighting for one highlight group. It
4886 is _not_ set back to the default colors.
4887
4888:hi[ghlight] [default] {group-name} {key}={arg} ..
4889 Add a highlight group, or change the highlighting for
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004890 an existing group. If a given color name is not
Bram Moolenaar519cc552021-11-16 19:18:26 +00004891 recognized, each `colors/lists/default.vim` found on
Bram Moolenaar113cb512021-11-07 20:27:04 +00004892 |'runtimepath'| will be loaded.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004893 See |highlight-args| for the {key}={arg} arguments.
4894 See |:highlight-default| for the optional [default]
4895 argument.
4896
4897Normally a highlight group is added once when starting up. This sets the
4898default values for the highlighting. After that, you can use additional
4899highlight commands to change the arguments that you want to set to non-default
4900values. The value "NONE" can be used to switch the value off or go back to
4901the default value.
4902
4903A simple way to change colors is with the |:colorscheme| command. This loads
4904a file with ":highlight" commands such as this: >
4905
4906 :hi Comment gui=bold
4907
4908Note that all settings that are not included remain the same, only the
4909specified field is used, and settings are merged with previous ones. So, the
4910result is like this single command has been used: >
4911 :hi Comment term=bold ctermfg=Cyan guifg=#80a0ff gui=bold
4912<
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004913 *:highlight-verbose*
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004914When listing a highlight group and 'verbose' is non-zero, the listing will
4915also tell where it was last set. Example: >
4916 :verbose hi Comment
4917< Comment xxx term=bold ctermfg=4 guifg=Blue ~
Bram Moolenaarc9b4b052006-04-30 18:54:39 +00004918 Last set from /home/mool/vim/vim7/runtime/syntax/syncolor.vim ~
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004919
Bram Moolenaar8aff23a2005-08-19 20:40:30 +00004920When ":hi clear" is used then the script where this command is used will be
4921mentioned for the default values. See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
Bram Moolenaar661b1822005-07-28 22:36:45 +00004922
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004923 *highlight-args* *E416* *E417* *E423*
4924There are three types of terminals for highlighting:
4925term a normal terminal (vt100, xterm)
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01004926cterm a color terminal (MS-Windows console, color-xterm, these have the "Co"
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004927 termcap entry)
4928gui the GUI
4929
4930For each type the highlighting can be given. This makes it possible to use
4931the same syntax file on all terminals, and use the optimal highlighting.
4932
49331. highlight arguments for normal terminals
4934
Bram Moolenaar75c50c42005-06-04 22:06:24 +00004935 *bold* *underline* *undercurl*
4936 *inverse* *italic* *standout*
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004937 *nocombine* *strikethrough*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004938term={attr-list} *attr-list* *highlight-term* *E418*
4939 attr-list is a comma separated list (without spaces) of the
4940 following items (in any order):
4941 bold
4942 underline
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004943 undercurl not always available
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004944 strikethrough not always available
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004945 reverse
4946 inverse same as reverse
4947 italic
4948 standout
Bram Moolenaar0cd2a942017-08-12 15:12:30 +02004949 nocombine override attributes instead of combining them
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004950 NONE no attributes used (used to reset it)
4951
4952 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
4953 have the same effect.
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00004954 "undercurl" is a curly underline. When "undercurl" is not possible
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02004955 then "underline" is used. In general "undercurl" and "strikethrough"
Bram Moolenaaracc22402020-06-07 21:07:18 +02004956 are only available in the GUI and some terminals. The color is set
4957 with |highlight-guisp| or |highlight-ctermul|. You can try these
4958 termcap entries to make undercurl work in a terminal: >
4959 let &t_Cs = "\e[4:3m"
4960 let &t_Ce = "\e[4:0m"
4961
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004962
4963start={term-list} *highlight-start* *E422*
4964stop={term-list} *term-list* *highlight-stop*
4965 These lists of terminal codes can be used to get
4966 non-standard attributes on a terminal.
4967
4968 The escape sequence specified with the "start" argument
4969 is written before the characters in the highlighted
4970 area. It can be anything that you want to send to the
4971 terminal to highlight this area. The escape sequence
4972 specified with the "stop" argument is written after the
4973 highlighted area. This should undo the "start" argument.
4974 Otherwise the screen will look messed up.
4975
4976 The {term-list} can have two forms:
4977
4978 1. A string with escape sequences.
4979 This is any string of characters, except that it can't start with
4980 "t_" and blanks are not allowed. The <> notation is recognized
4981 here, so you can use things like "<Esc>" and "<Space>". Example:
4982 start=<Esc>[27h;<Esc>[<Space>r;
4983
4984 2. A list of terminal codes.
4985 Each terminal code has the form "t_xx", where "xx" is the name of
4986 the termcap entry. The codes have to be separated with commas.
4987 White space is not allowed. Example:
4988 start=t_C1,t_BL
4989 The terminal codes must exist for this to work.
4990
4991
49922. highlight arguments for color terminals
4993
4994cterm={attr-list} *highlight-cterm*
4995 See above for the description of {attr-list} |attr-list|.
4996 The "cterm" argument is likely to be different from "term", when
4997 colors are used. For example, in a normal terminal comments could
4998 be underlined, in a color terminal they can be made Blue.
Bram Moolenaar68e65602019-05-26 21:33:31 +02004999 Note: Some terminals (e.g., DOS console) can't mix these attributes
5000 with coloring. To be portable, use only one of "cterm=" OR "ctermfg="
5001 OR "ctermbg=".
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005002
5003ctermfg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermfg* *E421*
5004ctermbg={color-nr} *highlight-ctermbg*
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005005ctermul={color-nr} *highlight-ctermul*
5006 These give the foreground (ctermfg), background (ctermbg) and
5007 underline (ctermul) color to use in the terminal.
5008
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005009 The {color-nr} argument is a color number. Its range is zero to
5010 (not including) the number given by the termcap entry "Co".
5011 The actual color with this number depends on the type of terminal
5012 and its settings. Sometimes the color also depends on the settings of
5013 "cterm". For example, on some systems "cterm=bold ctermfg=3" gives
5014 another color, on others you just get color 3.
5015
5016 For an xterm this depends on your resources, and is a bit
5017 unpredictable. See your xterm documentation for the defaults. The
5018 colors for a color-xterm can be changed from the .Xdefaults file.
5019 Unfortunately this means that it's not possible to get the same colors
5020 for each user. See |xterm-color| for info about color xterms.
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02005021 *tmux*
5022 When using tmux you may want to use this in the tmux config: >
5023 # tmux colors
Bram Moolenaar2346a632021-06-13 19:02:49 +02005024 set -s default-terminal "tmux-256color"
5025 set -as terminal-overrides ",*-256color:Tc"
Bram Moolenaard2ea7cf2021-05-30 20:54:13 +02005026< More info at:
5027 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-a-256-colour-terminal
5028 https://github.com/tmux/tmux/wiki/FAQ#how-do-i-use-rgb-colour
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005029
Bram Moolenaar5666fcd2019-12-26 14:35:26 +01005030 The MS-Windows standard colors are fixed (in a console window), so
5031 these have been used for the names. But the meaning of color names in
5032 X11 are fixed, so these color settings have been used, to make the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005033 highlighting settings portable (complicated, isn't it?). The
5034 following names are recognized, with the color number used:
5035
5036 *cterm-colors*
5037 NR-16 NR-8 COLOR NAME ~
5038 0 0 Black
5039 1 4 DarkBlue
5040 2 2 DarkGreen
5041 3 6 DarkCyan
5042 4 1 DarkRed
5043 5 5 DarkMagenta
5044 6 3 Brown, DarkYellow
5045 7 7 LightGray, LightGrey, Gray, Grey
5046 8 0* DarkGray, DarkGrey
5047 9 4* Blue, LightBlue
5048 10 2* Green, LightGreen
5049 11 6* Cyan, LightCyan
5050 12 1* Red, LightRed
5051 13 5* Magenta, LightMagenta
5052 14 3* Yellow, LightYellow
5053 15 7* White
5054
5055 The number under "NR-16" is used for 16-color terminals ('t_Co'
5056 greater than or equal to 16). The number under "NR-8" is used for
5057 8-color terminals ('t_Co' less than 16). The '*' indicates that the
5058 bold attribute is set for ctermfg. In many 8-color terminals (e.g.,
5059 "linux"), this causes the bright colors to appear. This doesn't work
5060 for background colors! Without the '*' the bold attribute is removed.
5061 If you want to set the bold attribute in a different way, put a
5062 "cterm=" argument AFTER the "ctermfg=" or "ctermbg=" argument. Or use
5063 a number instead of a color name.
5064
5065 The case of the color names is ignored.
5066 Note that for 16 color ansi style terminals (including xterms), the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005067 numbers in the NR-8 column is used. Here '*' means 'add 8' so that Blue
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005068 is 12, DarkGray is 8 etc.
5069
5070 Note that for some color terminals these names may result in the wrong
5071 colors!
5072
Bram Moolenaar5837f1f2015-03-21 18:06:14 +01005073 You can also use "NONE" to remove the color.
5074
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005075 *:hi-normal-cterm*
5076 When setting the "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" colors for the Normal group,
5077 these will become the colors used for the non-highlighted text.
5078 Example: >
5079 :highlight Normal ctermfg=grey ctermbg=darkblue
5080< When setting the "ctermbg" color for the Normal group, the
Bram Moolenaar6aa8cea2017-06-05 14:44:35 +02005081 'background' option will be adjusted automatically, under the
5082 condition that the color is recognized and 'background' was not set
5083 explicitly. This causes the highlight groups that depend on
5084 'background' to change! This means you should set the colors for
5085 Normal first, before setting other colors.
Bram Moolenaar723dd942019-04-04 13:11:03 +02005086 When a color scheme is being used, changing 'background' causes it to
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005087 be reloaded, which may reset all colors (including Normal). First
Bram Moolenaar8f3f58f2010-01-06 20:52:26 +01005088 delete the "g:colors_name" variable when you don't want this.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005089
5090 When you have set "ctermfg" or "ctermbg" for the Normal group, Vim
5091 needs to reset the color when exiting. This is done with the "op"
5092 termcap entry |t_op|. If this doesn't work correctly, try setting the
5093 't_op' option in your .vimrc.
Bram Moolenaare023e882020-05-31 16:42:30 +02005094 *E419* *E420* *E453*
5095 When Vim knows the normal foreground, background and underline colors,
5096 "fg", "bg" and "ul" can be used as color names. This only works after
5097 setting the colors for the Normal group and for the MS-Windows
5098 console. Example, for reverse video: >
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005099 :highlight Visual ctermfg=bg ctermbg=fg
5100< Note that the colors are used that are valid at the moment this
Bram Moolenaar75e15672020-06-28 13:10:22 +02005101 command is given. If the Normal group colors are changed later, the
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005102 "fg" and "bg" colors will not be adjusted.
5103
5104
51053. highlight arguments for the GUI
5106
5107gui={attr-list} *highlight-gui*
5108 These give the attributes to use in the GUI mode.
5109 See |attr-list| for a description.
5110 Note that "bold" can be used here and by using a bold font. They
5111 have the same effect.
5112 Note that the attributes are ignored for the "Normal" group.
5113
5114font={font-name} *highlight-font*
5115 font-name is the name of a font, as it is used on the system Vim
5116 runs on. For X11 this is a complicated name, for example: >
5117 font=-misc-fixed-bold-r-normal--14-130-75-75-c-70-iso8859-1
5118<
5119 The font-name "NONE" can be used to revert to the default font.
5120 When setting the font for the "Normal" group, this becomes the default
5121 font (until the 'guifont' option is changed; the last one set is
5122 used).
5123 The following only works with Motif and Athena, not with other GUIs:
5124 When setting the font for the "Menu" group, the menus will be changed.
5125 When setting the font for the "Tooltip" group, the tooltips will be
5126 changed.
5127 All fonts used, except for Menu and Tooltip, should be of the same
5128 character size as the default font! Otherwise redrawing problems will
5129 occur.
Bram Moolenaar82af8712016-06-04 20:20:29 +02005130 To use a font name with an embedded space or other special character,
5131 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5132 Example: >
5133 :hi comment font='Monospace 10'
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005134
5135guifg={color-name} *highlight-guifg*
5136guibg={color-name} *highlight-guibg*
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005137guisp={color-name} *highlight-guisp*
5138 These give the foreground (guifg), background (guibg) and special
Bram Moolenaarcf4b00c2017-09-02 18:33:56 +02005139 (guisp) color to use in the GUI. "guisp" is used for undercurl and
5140 strikethrough.
Bram Moolenaar7df351e2006-01-23 22:30:28 +00005141 There are a few special names:
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005142 NONE no color (transparent)
5143 bg use normal background color
5144 background use normal background color
5145 fg use normal foreground color
5146 foreground use normal foreground color
5147 To use a color name with an embedded space or other special character,
5148 put it in single quotes. The single quote cannot be used then.
5149 Example: >
5150 :hi comment guifg='salmon pink'
5151<
5152 *gui-colors*
5153 Suggested color names (these are available on most systems):
5154 Red LightRed DarkRed
5155 Green LightGreen DarkGreen SeaGreen
5156 Blue LightBlue DarkBlue SlateBlue
5157 Cyan LightCyan DarkCyan
5158 Magenta LightMagenta DarkMagenta
5159 Yellow LightYellow Brown DarkYellow
5160 Gray LightGray DarkGray
5161 Black White
5162 Orange Purple Violet
5163
5164 In the Win32 GUI version, additional system colors are available. See
5165 |win32-colors|.
5166
5167 You can also specify a color by its Red, Green and Blue values.
5168 The format is "#rrggbb", where
5169 "rr" is the Red value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005170 "gg" is the Green value
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +00005171 "bb" is the Blue value
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005172 All values are hexadecimal, range from "00" to "ff". Examples: >
Drew Vogele30d1022021-10-24 20:35:07 +01005173 :highlight Comment guifg=#11f0c3 guibg=#ff00ff
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005174<
Drew Vogele30d1022021-10-24 20:35:07 +01005175 If you are authoring a color scheme and use the same hexademical value
5176 repeatedly, you can define a name for it in |v:colornames|. For
5177 example: >
5178
5179 # provide a default value for this color but allow the user to
5180 # override it.
5181 :call extend(v:colornames, {'alt_turquoise': '#11f0c3'}, 'keep')
5182 :highlight Comment guifg=alt_turquoise guibg=magenta
5183<
5184 If you are using a color scheme that relies on named colors and you
5185 would like to adjust the precise appearance of those colors, you can
5186 do so by overriding the values in |v:colornames| prior to loading the
5187 scheme: >
5188
5189 let v:colornames['alt_turquoise'] = '#22f0d3'
5190 colorscheme alt
5191<
5192 If you want to develop a color list that can be relied on by others,
5193 it is best to prefix your color names. By convention these color lists
5194 are placed in the colors/lists directory. You can see an example in
5195 '$VIMRUNTIME/colors/lists/csscolors.vim'. This list would be sourced
5196 by a color scheme using: >
5197
5198 :runtime colors/lists/csscolors.vim
5199 :highlight Comment guifg=css_turquoise
5200<
5201
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005202 *highlight-groups* *highlight-default*
5203These are the default highlighting groups. These groups are used by the
5204'highlight' option default. Note that the highlighting depends on the value
5205of 'background'. You can see the current settings with the ":highlight"
5206command.
Bram Moolenaar1a384422010-07-14 19:53:30 +02005207 *hl-ColorColumn*
5208ColorColumn used for the columns set with 'colorcolumn'
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005209 *hl-Conceal*
5210Conceal placeholder characters substituted for concealed
5211 text (see 'conceallevel')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005212 *hl-Cursor*
5213Cursor the character under the cursor
Bram Moolenaarf90b6e02019-05-09 19:26:38 +02005214lCursor the character under the cursor when |language-mapping|
5215 is used (see 'guicursor')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005216 *hl-CursorIM*
5217CursorIM like Cursor, but used when in IME mode |CursorIM|
Bram Moolenaar5316eee2006-03-12 22:11:10 +00005218 *hl-CursorColumn*
5219CursorColumn the screen column that the cursor is in when 'cursorcolumn' is
5220 set
5221 *hl-CursorLine*
5222CursorLine the screen line that the cursor is in when 'cursorline' is
5223 set
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005224 *hl-Directory*
5225Directory directory names (and other special names in listings)
5226 *hl-DiffAdd*
5227DiffAdd diff mode: Added line |diff.txt|
5228 *hl-DiffChange*
5229DiffChange diff mode: Changed line |diff.txt|
5230 *hl-DiffDelete*
5231DiffDelete diff mode: Deleted line |diff.txt|
5232 *hl-DiffText*
5233DiffText diff mode: Changed text within a changed line |diff.txt|
Bram Moolenaardc1f1642016-08-16 18:33:43 +02005234 *hl-EndOfBuffer*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005235EndOfBuffer filler lines (~) after the last line in the buffer.
5236 By default, this is highlighted like |hl-NonText|.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005237 *hl-ErrorMsg*
5238ErrorMsg error messages on the command line
5239 *hl-VertSplit*
5240VertSplit the column separating vertically split windows
5241 *hl-Folded*
5242Folded line used for closed folds
5243 *hl-FoldColumn*
5244FoldColumn 'foldcolumn'
5245 *hl-SignColumn*
5246SignColumn column where |signs| are displayed
5247 *hl-IncSearch*
5248IncSearch 'incsearch' highlighting; also used for the text replaced with
5249 ":s///c"
5250 *hl-LineNr*
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005251LineNr Line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and when 'number'
Bram Moolenaar64486672010-05-16 15:46:46 +02005252 or 'relativenumber' option is set.
Bram Moolenaarefae76a2019-10-27 22:54:58 +01005253 *hl-LineNrAbove*
5254LineNrAbove Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5255 option is set, above the cursor line.
5256 *hl-LineNrBelow*
5257LineNrBelow Line number for when the 'relativenumber'
5258 option is set, below the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaar61d35bd2012-03-28 20:51:51 +02005259 *hl-CursorLineNr*
Bram Moolenaar89a9c152021-08-29 21:55:35 +02005260CursorLineNr Like LineNr when 'cursorline' is set and 'cursorlineopt'
5261 contains "number" or is "both", for the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaare413ea02021-11-24 16:20:13 +00005262 *hl-CursorLineSign*
5263CursorLineSign Like SignColumn when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line.
5264 *hl-CursorLineFold*
5265CursorLineFold Like FoldColumn when 'cursorline' is set for the cursor line.
Bram Moolenaarfd2ac762006-03-01 22:09:21 +00005266 *hl-MatchParen*
5267MatchParen The character under the cursor or just before it, if it
5268 is a paired bracket, and its match. |pi_paren.txt|
5269
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005270 *hl-ModeMsg*
5271ModeMsg 'showmode' message (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
5272 *hl-MoreMsg*
5273MoreMsg |more-prompt|
5274 *hl-NonText*
Bram Moolenaar58b85342016-08-14 19:54:54 +02005275NonText '@' at the end of the window, characters from 'showbreak'
5276 and other characters that do not really exist in the text
5277 (e.g., ">" displayed when a double-wide character doesn't
5278 fit at the end of the line).
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005279 *hl-Normal*
5280Normal normal text
Bram Moolenaar1c7715d2005-10-03 22:02:18 +00005281 *hl-Pmenu*
5282Pmenu Popup menu: normal item.
5283 *hl-PmenuSel*
5284PmenuSel Popup menu: selected item.
5285 *hl-PmenuSbar*
5286PmenuSbar Popup menu: scrollbar.
5287 *hl-PmenuThumb*
5288PmenuThumb Popup menu: Thumb of the scrollbar.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005289 *hl-Question*
5290Question |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005291 *hl-QuickFixLine*
5292QuickFixLine Current |quickfix| item in the quickfix window.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005293 *hl-Search*
5294Search Last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch').
Bram Moolenaar74675a62017-07-15 13:53:23 +02005295 Also used for similar items that need to stand out.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005296 *hl-SpecialKey*
5297SpecialKey Meta and special keys listed with ":map", also for text used
5298 to show unprintable characters in the text, 'listchars'.
5299 Generally: text that is displayed differently from what it
5300 really is.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005301 *hl-SpellBad*
5302SpellBad Word that is not recognized by the spellchecker. |spell|
5303 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar53180ce2005-07-05 21:48:14 +00005304 *hl-SpellCap*
5305SpellCap Word that should start with a capital. |spell|
5306 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar217ad922005-03-20 22:37:15 +00005307 *hl-SpellLocal*
5308SpellLocal Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5309 used in another region. |spell|
5310 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
5311 *hl-SpellRare*
5312SpellRare Word that is recognized by the spellchecker as one that is
5313 hardly ever used. |spell|
5314 This will be combined with the highlighting used otherwise.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005315 *hl-StatusLine*
5316StatusLine status line of current window
5317 *hl-StatusLineNC*
5318StatusLineNC status lines of not-current windows
5319 Note: if this is equal to "StatusLine" Vim will use "^^^" in
5320 the status line of the current window.
Bram Moolenaar40962ec2018-01-28 22:47:25 +01005321 *hl-StatusLineTerm*
5322StatusLineTerm status line of current window, if it is a |terminal| window.
5323 *hl-StatusLineTermNC*
5324StatusLineTermNC status lines of not-current windows that is a |terminal|
5325 window.
Bram Moolenaarfaa959a2006-02-20 21:37:40 +00005326 *hl-TabLine*
5327TabLine tab pages line, not active tab page label
5328 *hl-TabLineFill*
5329TabLineFill tab pages line, where there are no labels
5330 *hl-TabLineSel*
5331TabLineSel tab pages line, active tab page label
Bram Moolenaardf980db2017-12-24 13:22:00 +01005332 *hl-Terminal*
5333Terminal |terminal| window (see |terminal-size-color|)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005334 *hl-Title*
5335Title titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
5336 *hl-Visual*
5337Visual Visual mode selection
5338 *hl-VisualNOS*
5339VisualNOS Visual mode selection when vim is "Not Owning the Selection".
5340 Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and |xterm-clipboard| supports this.
5341 *hl-WarningMsg*
5342WarningMsg warning messages
5343 *hl-WildMenu*
5344WildMenu current match in 'wildmenu' completion
5345
Bram Moolenaarf75a9632005-09-13 21:20:47 +00005346 *hl-User1* *hl-User1..9* *hl-User9*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005347The 'statusline' syntax allows the use of 9 different highlights in the
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005348statusline and ruler (via 'rulerformat'). The names are User1 to User9.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005349
Bram Moolenaar8c8de832008-06-24 22:58:06 +00005350For the GUI you can use the following groups to set the colors for the menu,
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005351scrollbars and tooltips. They don't have defaults. This doesn't work for the
5352Win32 GUI. Only three highlight arguments have any effect here: font, guibg,
5353and guifg.
5354
5355 *hl-Menu*
5356Menu Current font, background and foreground colors of the menus.
5357 Also used for the toolbar.
5358 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5359
5360 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5361 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5362 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5363 set.
5364
5365 *hl-Scrollbar*
5366Scrollbar Current background and foreground of the main window's
5367 scrollbars.
5368 Applicable highlight arguments: guibg, guifg.
5369
5370 *hl-Tooltip*
5371Tooltip Current font, background and foreground of the tooltips.
5372 Applicable highlight arguments: font, guibg, guifg.
5373
5374 NOTE: For Motif and Athena the font argument actually
5375 specifies a fontset at all times, no matter if 'guifontset' is
5376 empty, and as such it is tied to the current |:language| when
5377 set.
5378
5379==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100538014. Linking groups *:hi-link* *:highlight-link* *E412* *E413*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005381
5382When you want to use the same highlighting for several syntax groups, you
5383can do this more easily by linking the groups into one common highlight
5384group, and give the color attributes only for that group.
5385
5386To set a link:
5387
5388 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} {to-group}
5389
5390To remove a link:
5391
5392 :hi[ghlight][!] [default] link {from-group} NONE
5393
5394Notes: *E414*
5395- If the {from-group} and/or {to-group} doesn't exist, it is created. You
5396 don't get an error message for a non-existing group.
5397- As soon as you use a ":highlight" command for a linked group, the link is
5398 removed.
5399- If there are already highlight settings for the {from-group}, the link is
5400 not made, unless the '!' is given. For a ":highlight link" command in a
5401 sourced file, you don't get an error message. This can be used to skip
5402 links for groups that already have settings.
5403
5404 *:hi-default* *:highlight-default*
5405The [default] argument is used for setting the default highlighting for a
5406group. If highlighting has already been specified for the group the command
5407will be ignored. Also when there is an existing link.
5408
5409Using [default] is especially useful to overrule the highlighting of a
5410specific syntax file. For example, the C syntax file contains: >
5411 :highlight default link cComment Comment
5412If you like Question highlighting for C comments, put this in your vimrc file: >
5413 :highlight link cComment Question
5414Without the "default" in the C syntax file, the highlighting would be
5415overruled when the syntax file is loaded.
5416
Bram Moolenaar23515b42020-11-29 14:36:24 +01005417To have a link survive `:highlight clear`, which is useful if you have
5418highlighting for a specific filetype and you want to keep it when selecting
5419another color scheme, put a command like this in the
5420"after/syntax/{filetype}.vim" file: >
5421 highlight! default link cComment Question
5422
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005423==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100542415. Cleaning up *:syn-clear* *E391*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005425
5426If you want to clear the syntax stuff for the current buffer, you can use this
5427command: >
5428 :syntax clear
5429
5430This command should be used when you want to switch off syntax highlighting,
5431or when you want to switch to using another syntax. It's normally not needed
5432in a syntax file itself, because syntax is cleared by the autocommands that
5433load the syntax file.
5434The command also deletes the "b:current_syntax" variable, since no syntax is
5435loaded after this command.
5436
Bram Moolenaar61da1bf2019-06-06 12:14:49 +02005437To clean up specific syntax groups for the current buffer: >
5438 :syntax clear {group-name} ..
5439This removes all patterns and keywords for {group-name}.
5440
5441To clean up specific syntax group lists for the current buffer: >
5442 :syntax clear @{grouplist-name} ..
5443This sets {grouplist-name}'s contents to an empty list.
5444
5445 *:syntax-off* *:syn-off*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005446If you want to disable syntax highlighting for all buffers, you need to remove
5447the autocommands that load the syntax files: >
5448 :syntax off
5449
5450What this command actually does, is executing the command >
5451 :source $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/nosyntax.vim
5452See the "nosyntax.vim" file for details. Note that for this to work
5453$VIMRUNTIME must be valid. See |$VIMRUNTIME|.
5454
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005455 *:syntax-reset* *:syn-reset*
5456If you have changed the colors and messed them up, use this command to get the
5457defaults back: >
5458
5459 :syntax reset
5460
Bram Moolenaar03413f42016-04-12 21:07:15 +02005461It is a bit of a wrong name, since it does not reset any syntax items, it only
5462affects the highlighting.
5463
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005464This doesn't change the colors for the 'highlight' option.
5465
5466Note that the syntax colors that you set in your vimrc file will also be reset
5467back to their Vim default.
5468Note that if you are using a color scheme, the colors defined by the color
5469scheme for syntax highlighting will be lost.
5470
5471What this actually does is: >
5472
5473 let g:syntax_cmd = "reset"
5474 runtime! syntax/syncolor.vim
5475
5476Note that this uses the 'runtimepath' option.
5477
5478 *syncolor*
5479If you want to use different colors for syntax highlighting, you can add a Vim
5480script file to set these colors. Put this file in a directory in
5481'runtimepath' which comes after $VIMRUNTIME, so that your settings overrule
5482the default colors. This way these colors will be used after the ":syntax
5483reset" command.
5484
5485For Unix you can use the file ~/.vim/after/syntax/syncolor.vim. Example: >
5486
5487 if &background == "light"
5488 highlight comment ctermfg=darkgreen guifg=darkgreen
5489 else
5490 highlight comment ctermfg=green guifg=green
5491 endif
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00005492<
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00005493 *E679*
5494Do make sure this syncolor.vim script does not use a "syntax on", set the
5495'background' option or uses a "colorscheme" command, because it results in an
5496endless loop.
5497
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005498Note that when a color scheme is used, there might be some confusion whether
5499your defined colors are to be used or the colors from the scheme. This
5500depends on the color scheme file. See |:colorscheme|.
5501
5502 *syntax_cmd*
5503The "syntax_cmd" variable is set to one of these values when the
5504syntax/syncolor.vim files are loaded:
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00005505 "on" `:syntax on` command. Highlight colors are overruled but
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005506 links are kept
Bram Moolenaar88a42052021-11-21 21:13:36 +00005507 "enable" `:syntax enable` command. Only define colors for groups that
5508 don't have highlighting yet. Use `:highlight default` .
5509 "reset" `:syntax reset` command or loading a color scheme. Define all
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005510 the colors.
5511 "skip" Don't define colors. Used to skip the default settings when a
5512 syncolor.vim file earlier in 'runtimepath' has already set
5513 them.
5514
5515==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100551616. Highlighting tags *tag-highlight*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005517
5518If you want to highlight all the tags in your file, you can use the following
5519mappings.
5520
5521 <F11> -- Generate tags.vim file, and highlight tags.
5522 <F12> -- Just highlight tags based on existing tags.vim file.
5523>
5524 :map <F11> :sp tags<CR>:%s/^\([^ :]*:\)\=\([^ ]*\).*/syntax keyword Tag \2/<CR>:wq! tags.vim<CR>/^<CR><F12>
5525 :map <F12> :so tags.vim<CR>
5526
5527WARNING: The longer the tags file, the slower this will be, and the more
5528memory Vim will consume.
5529
5530Only highlighting typedefs, unions and structs can be done too. For this you
5531must use Exuberant ctags (found at http://ctags.sf.net).
5532
5533Put these lines in your Makefile:
5534
5535# Make a highlight file for types. Requires Exuberant ctags and awk
5536types: types.vim
5537types.vim: *.[ch]
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005538 ctags --c-kinds=gstu -o- *.[ch] |\
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005539 awk 'BEGIN{printf("syntax keyword Type\t")}\
5540 {printf("%s ", $$1)}END{print ""}' > $@
5541
5542And put these lines in your .vimrc: >
5543
5544 " load the types.vim highlighting file, if it exists
5545 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] let fname = expand('<afile>:p:h') . '/types.vim'
5546 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] if filereadable(fname)
5547 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] exe 'so ' . fname
5548 autocmd BufRead,BufNewFile *.[ch] endif
5549
5550==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100555117. Window-local syntax *:ownsyntax*
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005552
5553Normally all windows on a buffer share the same syntax settings. It is
5554possible, however, to set a particular window on a file to have its own
5555private syntax setting. A possible example would be to edit LaTeX source
5556with conventional highlighting in one window, while seeing the same source
5557highlighted differently (so as to hide control sequences and indicate bold,
5558italic etc regions) in another. The 'scrollbind' option is useful here.
5559
5560To set the current window to have the syntax "foo", separately from all other
5561windows on the buffer: >
5562 :ownsyntax foo
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005563< *w:current_syntax*
5564This will set the "w:current_syntax" variable to "foo". The value of
5565"b:current_syntax" does not change. This is implemented by saving and
5566restoring "b:current_syntax", since the syntax files do set
5567"b:current_syntax". The value set by the syntax file is assigned to
5568"w:current_syntax".
Bram Moolenaared32d942014-12-06 23:33:00 +01005569Note: This resets the 'spell', 'spellcapcheck' and 'spellfile' options.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005570
5571Once a window has its own syntax, syntax commands executed from other windows
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005572on the same buffer (including :syntax clear) have no effect. Conversely,
Bram Moolenaarbf884932013-04-05 22:26:15 +02005573syntax commands executed from that window do not affect other windows on the
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005574same buffer.
5575
Bram Moolenaardebe25a2010-06-06 17:41:24 +02005576A window with its own syntax reverts to normal behavior when another buffer
5577is loaded into that window or the file is reloaded.
5578When splitting the window, the new window will use the original syntax.
Bram Moolenaar860cae12010-06-05 23:22:07 +02005579
5580==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100558118. Color xterms *xterm-color* *color-xterm*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005582
5583Most color xterms have only eight colors. If you don't get colors with the
5584default setup, it should work with these lines in your .vimrc: >
5585 :if &term =~ "xterm"
5586 : if has("terminfo")
5587 : set t_Co=8
5588 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%p1%dm
5589 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%p1%dm
5590 : else
5591 : set t_Co=8
5592 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5593 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5594 : endif
5595 :endif
5596< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5597
5598You might want to change the first "if" to match the name of your terminal,
5599e.g. "dtterm" instead of "xterm".
5600
5601Note: Do these settings BEFORE doing ":syntax on". Otherwise the colors may
5602be wrong.
5603 *xiterm* *rxvt*
5604The above settings have been mentioned to work for xiterm and rxvt too.
5605But for using 16 colors in an rxvt these should work with terminfo: >
5606 :set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t25;%p1%{40}%+%e5;%p1%{32}%+%;%dm
5607 :set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t22;%p1%{30}%+%e1;%p1%{22}%+%;%dm
5608<
5609 *colortest.vim*
5610To test your color setup, a file has been included in the Vim distribution.
Bram Moolenaarf740b292006-02-16 22:11:02 +00005611To use it, execute this command: >
5612 :runtime syntax/colortest.vim
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005613
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005614Some versions of xterm (and other terminals, like the Linux console) can
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005615output lighter foreground colors, even though the number of colors is defined
5616at 8. Therefore Vim sets the "cterm=bold" attribute for light foreground
5617colors, when 't_Co' is 8.
5618
5619 *xfree-xterm*
5620To get 16 colors or more, get the newest xterm version (which should be
Bram Moolenaar13fcaaf2005-04-15 21:13:42 +00005621included with XFree86 3.3 and later). You can also find the latest version
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005622at: >
5623 http://invisible-island.net/xterm/xterm.html
5624Here is a good way to configure it. This uses 88 colors and enables the
5625termcap-query feature, which allows Vim to ask the xterm how many colors it
5626supports. >
5627 ./configure --disable-bold-color --enable-88-color --enable-tcap-query
5628If you only get 8 colors, check the xterm compilation settings.
5629(Also see |UTF8-xterm| for using this xterm with UTF-8 character encoding).
5630
5631This xterm should work with these lines in your .vimrc (for 16 colors): >
5632 :if has("terminfo")
5633 : set t_Co=16
5634 : set t_AB=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{92}%+%;%dm
5635 : set t_AF=<Esc>[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{82}%+%;%dm
5636 :else
5637 : set t_Co=16
5638 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[3%dm
5639 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[4%dm
5640 :endif
5641< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5642
5643Without |+terminfo|, Vim will recognize these settings, and automatically
5644translate cterm colors of 8 and above to "<Esc>[9%dm" and "<Esc>[10%dm".
5645Colors above 16 are also translated automatically.
5646
5647For 256 colors this has been reported to work: >
5648
5649 :set t_AB=<Esc>[48;5;%dm
5650 :set t_AF=<Esc>[38;5;%dm
5651
5652Or just set the TERM environment variable to "xterm-color" or "xterm-16color"
5653and try if that works.
5654
5655You probably want to use these X resources (in your ~/.Xdefaults file):
5656 XTerm*color0: #000000
5657 XTerm*color1: #c00000
5658 XTerm*color2: #008000
5659 XTerm*color3: #808000
5660 XTerm*color4: #0000c0
5661 XTerm*color5: #c000c0
5662 XTerm*color6: #008080
5663 XTerm*color7: #c0c0c0
5664 XTerm*color8: #808080
5665 XTerm*color9: #ff6060
5666 XTerm*color10: #00ff00
5667 XTerm*color11: #ffff00
5668 XTerm*color12: #8080ff
5669 XTerm*color13: #ff40ff
5670 XTerm*color14: #00ffff
5671 XTerm*color15: #ffffff
5672 Xterm*cursorColor: Black
5673
5674[Note: The cursorColor is required to work around a bug, which changes the
5675cursor color to the color of the last drawn text. This has been fixed by a
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005676newer version of xterm, but not everybody is using it yet.]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005677
5678To get these right away, reload the .Xdefaults file to the X Option database
5679Manager (you only need to do this when you just changed the .Xdefaults file): >
5680 xrdb -merge ~/.Xdefaults
5681<
5682 *xterm-blink* *xterm-blinking-cursor*
5683To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see tools/blink.c. Or use Thomas
5684Dickey's xterm above patchlevel 107 (see above for where to get it), with
5685these resources:
5686 XTerm*cursorBlink: on
5687 XTerm*cursorOnTime: 400
5688 XTerm*cursorOffTime: 250
5689 XTerm*cursorColor: White
5690
5691 *hpterm-color*
Bram Moolenaarc81e5e72007-05-05 18:24:42 +00005692These settings work (more or less) for an hpterm, which only supports 8
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005693foreground colors: >
5694 :if has("terminfo")
5695 : set t_Co=8
5696 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%p1%dS
5697 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5698 :else
5699 : set t_Co=8
5700 : set t_Sf=<Esc>[&v%dS
5701 : set t_Sb=<Esc>[&v7S
5702 :endif
5703< [<Esc> is a real escape, type CTRL-V <Esc>]
5704
5705 *Eterm* *enlightened-terminal*
5706These settings have been reported to work for the Enlightened terminal
5707emulator, or Eterm. They might work for all xterm-like terminals that use the
5708bold attribute to get bright colors. Add an ":if" like above when needed. >
5709 :set t_Co=16
5710 :set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t3%p1%d%e%p1%{22}%+%d;1%;m
5711 :set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t4%p1%d%e%p1%{32}%+%d;1%;m
5712<
5713 *TTpro-telnet*
5714These settings should work for TTpro telnet. Tera Term Pro is a freeware /
5715open-source program for MS-Windows. >
5716 set t_Co=16
5717 set t_AB=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{40}%+%e%p1%{32}%+5;%;%dm
5718 set t_AF=^[[%?%p1%{8}%<%t%p1%{30}%+%e%p1%{22}%+1;%;%dm
5719Also make sure TTpro's Setup / Window / Full Color is enabled, and make sure
5720that Setup / Font / Enable Bold is NOT enabled.
5721(info provided by John Love-Jensen <eljay@Adobe.COM>)
5722
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005723
5724==============================================================================
Bram Moolenaar9d87a372018-12-18 21:41:50 +0100572519. When syntax is slow *:syntime*
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005726
5727This is aimed at authors of a syntax file.
5728
5729If your syntax causes redrawing to be slow, here are a few hints on making it
5730faster. To see slowness switch on some features that usually interfere, such
5731as 'relativenumber' and |folding|.
5732
Bram Moolenaar203d04d2013-06-06 21:36:40 +02005733Note: this is only available when compiled with the |+profile| feature.
5734You many need to build Vim with "huge" features.
5735
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005736To find out what patterns are consuming most time, get an overview with this
5737sequence: >
5738 :syntime on
5739 [ redraw the text at least once with CTRL-L ]
5740 :syntime report
5741
5742This will display a list of syntax patterns that were used, sorted by the time
5743it took to match them against the text.
5744
5745:syntime on Start measuring syntax times. This will add some
5746 overhead to compute the time spent on syntax pattern
5747 matching.
5748
5749:syntime off Stop measuring syntax times.
5750
5751:syntime clear Set all the counters to zero, restart measuring.
5752
5753:syntime report Show the syntax items used since ":syntime on" in the
5754 current window. Use a wider display to see more of
5755 the output.
5756
5757 The list is sorted by total time. The columns are:
5758 TOTAL Total time in seconds spent on
5759 matching this pattern.
5760 COUNT Number of times the pattern was used.
5761 MATCH Number of times the pattern actually
5762 matched
5763 SLOWEST The longest time for one try.
5764 AVERAGE The average time for one try.
5765 NAME Name of the syntax item. Note that
5766 this is not unique.
5767 PATTERN The pattern being used.
5768
5769Pattern matching gets slow when it has to try many alternatives. Try to
5770include as much literal text as possible to reduce the number of ways a
5771pattern does NOT match.
5772
5773When using the "\@<=" and "\@<!" items, add a maximum size to avoid trying at
5774all positions in the current and previous line. For example, if the item is
5775literal text specify the size of that text (in bytes):
5776
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005777"<\@<=span" Matches "span" in "<span". This tries matching with "<" in
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005778 many places.
Bram Moolenaar56b45b92013-06-24 22:22:18 +02005779"<\@1<=span" Matches the same, but only tries one byte before "span".
Bram Moolenaar8a7f5a22013-06-06 14:01:46 +02005780
5781
Bram Moolenaar91f84f62018-07-29 15:07:52 +02005782 vim:tw=78:sw=4:ts=8:noet:ft=help:norl: